Home

Dell Color Multifunction Printer E525w User's Guide

1. o ee 241 IS Fy tare te ool ich amp fore amity wa Bo ee dlc 242 21 Understanding Your Printer Software 243 Dell Printer Hub Windows Only ae oia a bas 243 22 Using Digital CertificateS 244 Setting a Digital Certificate 2 2 ee ee 244 Preparing to Use HTTPS Communication 244 Exporting a Certificate Signing Request CSR 245 Uploading a Signed Certificate 245 Managing the Digital Certificate 246 Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate 246 Deleting a Digital Certificate 246 Setting the SSL TLS Communication Feature 247 Enabling the SSL TLS Communication Between the Printer and Client COMPULETS oie cee sey eh a ts a aa 247 Enabling the SSL TLS Communication Between the Printer and an EDAP SAO swt 8d and il ia a rt a 247 Enabling the SSL TLS Communication Between the Printer and an SMTP Servera ts tn e A 247 23 Understanding Printer Messages 248 24 Specifications tt EAS 255 Operating System Compatibility 255 Power Supply cocoa ciar a a a 255 DIMENSIONS 400 ri a at da E 255 Memory 0 00 veena pl da a Eee Bee a tale ee Bee 255 LE ok ye ean es Bo a Oe ie ie an AE 256 MIB Compatibiliy 0 0000000020 256 Environment a i adoru a aad a e a ee 256 Cable
2. o o 164 Envelopes i fea ee a a eae be 164 Labelss 20 400 ee ehh ie ehh ac De oe A 165 Storing Print Media 00 a 166 Identifying Print Media and Specifications 166 Supported Paper Sizes 2 2 o e 166 Supported Paper Types o o e 167 Paper Type Specifications 0 o o 167 16 Loading Print Media 0 168 Capacity o cooccicia a a de ee ee LD N 168 Print Media Dimensions o e o 168 Loading Print Media in the Standard 150 Sheet Tray 168 Loading Envelopes o e ee 171 Loading Letterhead 0 o o 02000002 eee eae 173 Loading Print Media When Manual Duplex Printing 174 Using the Output Tray Extension 2 2 2 0 175 Printing Copying Scanning and Faxing 176 A IE E EA 177 Tips for Successful Printing o o o o oo 177 Tips on Storing Print Media o o 177 Avoiding Paper Jams o o o 177 Sending a Job to Print o o 177 Canceling a Print Job o o o eee 178 8 Contents Canceling From the Operator Panel o 178 Canceling a Job From the Computer Running Windows 178 Using the Secure Print Feature o 0 000000 ee 179 Procedur
3. 031 588 Press the Y Set button Check if the FTP server encounters any write protection or disk problem 031 589 Press the Y Set button to clear the message Check if the storage location has free space 031 594 Press the Set button Execute the operation again according to the operation procedure Contact Dell if this message appears repeatedly See Contacting Dell on page 310 031 598 Press the Y Set button Check if the FTP server encounters any write protection or disk problem 033 503 Press the Y Set button to clear the message Delete the unnecessary data stored in the memory 033 513 033 517 Press the Y Set button Check if the password is correct 033 518 Press the Y Set button Check if your country code is set correctly 033 519 Fax service is locked To continue press the Y Set button to clear the message and disable the fax lock 033 787 Press the Set button to clear the message Delete the unnecessary data stored in the memory or wait for 033 788 a while until sending a fax is completed 034 700 Press the Set button to clear the message If the error continues to appear after the redial for the 034 701 specified number of times try the following 034 702 e Check if the phone line is connected properly See Connecting the Telephone Line on page 35 034 703 e Check if the destination number is available 034 704 e Set Number of Redial to the larger value 034 705 e Set Resend Delay orRedial Delay longer 034 70
4. Values GroupID Name Displays a group ID and the assigned group name IDs without an entry show Not in Use in the Name column Delete Deletes the entry for the selected group ID Confirm Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected group ID Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected group ID E mail Group Confirm Change Create Purpose To view or edit the e mail address group entries on the E mail Group page or create a new entry The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm Change or Create on the E mail Group top page Values E mail Group ID Displays the selected group ID Name Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for the group ID or enter a new group name E mail Address Address List to Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs indicated on the button ID Name Displays a user ID and the name of the user registered under that user ID IDs without an entry show Not in Use in the Name column Address Allows you to view or edit the e mail address of an entry registered under the selected user ID or enter an e mail address for the new entry Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings Back Click this button to return to the top page E mail Group Delete Purpose
5. Problem Action The Certificate Signing Request CSR Upload Signed Certificate is not displayed Create a self signed certificate and enable SSL TLS Server Communication For details see Preparing to Use HTTPS Communication on page 244 The certificate cannot be imported Confirm validity period of the certificate as well as the time setting of the printer Confirm whether the password is correct Confirm whether the file type is PRCS 7 12 or x509CACert extension p7b p12 pfx cer crt Confirm whether the attribute information key usage extended key usage of the certificate to be imported is set correctly Use Internet Explorer Although a certificate was imported it is not displayed To import a certificate for use with the device own device import the secret key and a certificate of the PKCS 12 p12 pfx format as a pair Server validation is not operating correctly Although importing a root certificate Trusted to use for server authentication an intermediate certificate may be required when validating the path When executing a certificate file with the certification authority create the certificate with a format including all paths and then import that certificate Troubleshooting 305 Wi Fi Direct Problems Problem Action The device cannot discover the printer The printer may be connected to another device via Wi Fi Direct Disconnect the printer
6. coou Goan coms oon con Favorites Default Al Defaults 5 Select the desired properties from the Image Quality and Image Options tabs 6 Click Scan to start scanning 7 Follow the on screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied to your computer 202 Scanning Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition WIA Driver Your printer also supports the WIA driver for scanning images WIA is one of the standard components provided by Windows operating systems and works with digital cameras and scanners Unlike the TWAIN driver the WIA driver allows you to scan an image and easily manipulate those images without using additional software K NOTE Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer using the USB cable 1 on SO ol Load the document s face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document s in first OR Place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 or Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 Start the drawing software such as Paint K NOTE When you use Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 use Windows Photo Gallery instead of Paint Click File gt From Scanner or Camera Paint button gt From scanner or camera for Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2012 and Windows Serve
7. Fan the document well before loading it in the ADE Vertical lines appear on the output when scanned using the ADE Clean the ADF glass See Cleaning the Scanner on page 272 Troubleshooting 303 Problem Action A smear appears at the same location on the output when scanned using the document glass Clean the document glass See Cleaning the Scanner on page 272 Images are skewed Ensure that the document is loaded straight in the ADF or on the document glass Diagonal lines appear jagged when scanned using the ADE If the document uses thick media try scanning it from the document glass The printer does not properly transfer scan data to a specified destination via the Scan to E mail or Scan to Network Folder feature Check if the following settings have been set correctly on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Scan to Network Folder Check the following settings under Address Book gt Server Address e Server Address e Share Name e Server Path Login Name e Login Password Scan to E mail Check the following setting under Address Book gt Fax E mail E mail Address Cannot scan using Windows Image Acquisition WIA on a Microsoft Windows Server 2003 computer Enable WIA on the computer To enable WIA 1 Click Start point to Administrative Tools and then click Services 2 Right click Windows Image Acquisition WIA and then click Start Ca
8. Press the E Menu button Press the Y button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Network is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the Y button until Wi Fi Direct Setup is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until PIN Code is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Select Reset PIN Code The PIN code is reset Printing Mobile Printing The printer supports printing from a variety of mobile devices Android OS Download the Dell Document Hub app for free from Google Play Easy to use and navigate the Dell Document Hub app enables direct printing of photos documents web content and more to supported Dell printers on a Wi Fi Wi Fi Direct or Ethernet network Scan the OR Code for quick access to the relevant application store For Android OS Apple i0S This printer is compatible with AirPrint For details about AirPrint see Printing With AirPrint on page 185 This printer is also compatible with Dell Document Hub App available for free download from App Store Scan the OR Code for quick access to the relevant application store For Apple OS Printing With AirPrint This section provides information for printing with AirPrint AirPrint allows you to print through a network with iPad all models iPhone 3GS or lat
9. Press the V or A button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad and then press the Y Set button K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings 4 mm 0 2 inch Specify the value in increments of 1 mm 0 1 inch Available Range 0 50 mm 0 0 2 0 inch Margin Middle To specify the middle margin of the copy 1 0 Aa Y N 198 Load the document s face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document s in first OR Place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 or Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 Press the GB Copy button Press the V button until Preferences is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press the V button until Margin Middle is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V or A button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad and then press the Y Set button K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings 0 mm 0 0 inch Specify the value in increments of 1 mm 0 1 inch Available Range 0 50 mm 0 0 2 0 inch Copying Copying an ID Card You can copy both sides of ID card on one side of a sheet of paper in its original size by selecting Start ID Copy To make a copy 1 Place an ID card facing down on the document glass
10. To delete the e mail group entries registered on the E mail Group page The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Delete on the E mail Group top page Values ID Displays the selected group ID Name Displays the name assigned for the group ID Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings Back Click this button to return to the top page 114 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool E mail Default Setup Purpose To set the default e mail subject and message Values Default Subject Allows you to enter the default e mail subject Up to 50 alphanumeric characters can be entered Body Text Allows you to enter the default e mail message Up to 200 alphanumeric characters can be entered Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings Server Address Server Address Top Page Purpose To view the server address entries registered on the Server Address page Values Address List to Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs indicated on the button ID Name Displays a server ID and the name of a file directory registered under that server ID IDs without an entry show Not in Use in the Name column Server Address Displays the address of the file directory Delete Deletes the entry for the selected server ID Con
11. Traditional Sort es ES tradnl e German Germany de DE e French France fr FR English United States en us e Danish da DK e Dutch Netherlands nl NL e Norwegian Bokmal no e Swedish sv SE Setting the IP Address of the printer to Non Proxy 1 Select Internet Options from the Tools menu 2 Click LAN Settings under Local Area Network LAN settings in the Connections tab 3 You can configure the LAN settings in one of the following ways e Clear the Use a proxy server for your LAN check box under Proxy server e Click Advanced and then specify the IP address of your printer in the Do not use proxy server for addresses beginning with field under Exceptions After setting the language and proxy enter lt http nnn nnn nnn nnn gt the IP address of your printer in the URL entry field of the browser to activate the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Up From Operator Panel You can launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool only when EWS is set to Enable the factory default on the operator panel Check the operator panel setting if you cannot launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool For more information see Understanding the Printer Menus on page 117 Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool enter the IP address of your printer in your web browser ad E a Rexe If you do not know the IP address of your printer prin
12. A5 148 x 210mm B5 182 x 257mm Letter 8 5 x 11 Folio 8 5 x 13 Legal 8 5 x 14 Executive 7 25 x 10 5 Envelope 10 4 1x9 5 Monarch Env 3 9x7 5 Monarch Env L 7 5x3 9 DL Env 110x220mm DL Env L 220x110mm C5 Envelope 162 x 229mm Custom Size Portrait Y 297 mm Specifies the length of the custom size paper Available Range 127 355 mm Landscape X 210 mm Specifies the width of the custom size paper Available Range 77 215 mm The default varies depending on country specific factory default 130 Understanding the Printer Menus inch series Letter 8 5 x 11 Folio 8 5 x 13 Legal 8 5 x 14 A4 210 x 297mm A5 148 x 210mm B5 182 x 257mm Executive 7 25 x 10 5 Envelope 10 4 1x9 5 Monarch Env 3 9x7 5 Monarch Env L 7 5x3 9 DL Env 110x220mm DL Env L 220x110mm C5 Envelope 162 x 229mm Custom Size Portrait Y 11 7 inch Specifies the length of the custom size paper Available Range 5 0 14 0 inches Landscape X 8 3 inch Specifies the width of the custom size paper Available Range 3 0 8 5 inches The default varies depending on country specific factory default Orientation Purpose To specify how text and graphics are oriented on the page Values Portrait Prints text and graphics paral
13. Label Light Normal Adjust Transfer Roller Purpose To specify the optimum voltage settings for printing To decrease the voltage set negative values To increase the voltage set positive values The default settings may not give the best output quality on all paper types If you see mottles on the printed paper try to increase the voltage If you see white spots on the printed paper try to decrease the voltage K NOTE The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item Values Plain 0 Available Range 3 3 Plain Thick 0 Available Range 3 3 Covers 0 Available Range 3 3 Coated 0 Available Range 3 3 Label 0 Available Range 3 3 Recycled 0 Available Range 3 3 Envelope 0 Available Range 3 3 154 Understanding the Printer Menus Adjust Fusing Unit Purpose To specify the optimum temperature settings for printing To decrease the temperature set negative values To increase the temperature set positive values The default settings may not give the best output quality on all paper types When the printed paper has curled try to decrease the temperature When the toner does not fuse on the paper properly try to increase the temperature K NOTE The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item Values Plain 0
14. Paper size A4 A5 B5 Executive Letter Folio Legal Monarch DL C5 Envelope 10 Zoom rate Document glass 25 400 ADF 25 400 Multiple copies 1 99 pages Copy mode Original Type Text Text amp Photo Photo Scanning method Document glass Document fixed flatbed scanning method ADF Carriage fixed document feeding scanning method one side scanning Scanner Specifications Item Description Compatibility Tool Without An Interesting Name TWAIN Windows Image Acquisition WIA Scan resolution TWAIN 75 x 75 to 4800 x 4800 dots 25 4 mm 1 inch WIA 75 100 150 200 300 400 600 dots 25 4 mm 1 inch Resolutions other than the following are achieved by driver s resolution conversion 200 x 200 dots 25 4 mm 1 inch 300 x 300 dots 25 4 mm 1 inch Default 600 x 600 dots 25 4 mm 1 inch 1200 x 1200 dots 25 4 mm 1 inch Color bit depth 24 bit WIA TWAIN Mono bit depth 1 bit for Line art and 8 bit for Grayscale Effective scanning length Document glass 297 mm 11 69 inches ADF 355 6 mm 14 inches Effective scanning width 215 9 mm 8 5 inches Scan speed Text mode Black amp White 600 dpi 100 89 mm sec 1200 dpi 26 15 mm sec Color 600 dpi 33 6 mm sec 1200 dpi 8 7 mm sec 258 Specifications Facsimile Specifications Item Description Compatibility ITU T Group 3 Applicable line Public Switched Tele
15. Press the V button until Panel is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the lt button and ensure that Get IP Address is highlighted Press the V button until IP Address is highlighted and then press the Y Set button The cursor is located at the first three digits of the IP address Enter the value of the IP address using the numeric keypad Press the gt button The next three digits are highlighted Repeat step 11 and step 12 to enter all of the digits in the IP address and then press the Y Set button Press the lt button and ensure that IP Address is highlighted Press the V button until Subnet Mask is highlighted and then press the Y Set button The cursor is located at the first three digits of the subnet mask Setting the IP Address 43 16 Enter the value of the subnet mask using the numeric keypad 17 Press the gt button The next three digits are highlighted 18 Repeat step 16 and step 17 to set subnet mask and then press the Y Set button 19 Press the lt button and ensure that Subnet Mask is highlighted 20 Press the V button until Gateway Address is highlighted and then press the Y Set button The cursor is located at the first three digits of the gateway address 21 Enter the value of the gateway address using the numeric keypad 22 Press the gt button The next three digits are highlighted 23 Repeat step 21 and step 22 to set gateway address and then press the Y Set button
16. Press the W button until Network is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Wireless Setup is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Manual Setup is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Enter the SSID and then press the Y Set button Select the network mode from Infrastructure or Ad hoc depending on your environment and then press the Y Set button If you select Infrastructure proceed to step 9 If you select Ad hoc proceed to step 10 Select the encryption type from No Security Mixed Mode PSK WPA2 PSK AES or WEP If you do not set security for your wireless network e Press the V button until No Security is highlighted and then press the Y Set button To use Mixed Mode PSK or WPA2 PSK AES encryption a Press the V button until Mixed Mode PSK or WPA2 PSK AES is highlighted and then press the Y Set button b Enter the passphrase and then press the ye Set button K NOTE A passphrase is an encryption key for WPA and WPA2 encryption which consists of 8 to 63 bytes ASCII or 8 to 64 bytes Hex It may be described as a key on some access points or routers For details refer to the manual supplied with the access point or router To use WEP encryption a Pressthe V button until WEP is highlighted and then press the Y Set button b Enter the WEP key and then press the Set button c Press the V button to highl
17. Super Fine Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail The Super Fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine also supports the super fine resolution See the notes below Ultra Fine Suitable for documents containing photographic images K NOTE Faxes scanned in the Super Fine mode transmit at the highest resolution supported by the receiving device Original Type Purpose To select the default document type Values Text Suitable for documents with text Photo Suitable for documents with photos Lighter Darker Purpose To set the default copy density level Values Lighter2 Makes the fax lighter than the original Works well with dark print Lighter Normal Works well with standard typed or printed documents Darkerl Makes the fax darker than the original Works well with light print or faint pencil markings Darker2 Delayed Start Purpose To set a specific time for the fax transmission to start Once this setting is activated your printer stores all of the documents to be faxed into its memory and sends them at the specified time After faxing is complete the data in the memory is cleared Values 21 00 PM9 00 Specifies the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a specified time 0 00 23 59 AM PM1 00 12 59 K NOTE A maximum of 19 delayed fax jobs can be stored in this printer Understanding the Printer Menus 125 Print fro
18. 207 Registering Destinations inthe Address Book 209 Sending the Scanned File to a Computer or Server 215 Scanning to USB Memory 0 00000 eee eae 215 Basic Scanning Procedures o o eee eee 215 Using the ID Scan 3 ooo ee a ee ea ee Y 216 Sending an E mail With the Scanned Image 216 Setting an E mail Address Book 2 2 0000000 216 Sending an E mail With the Scanned File 218 20 OMAN i Bo BS IN AI 221 Configuring Fax Initial Settings lt lt 221 Setting Your COUMtY aoaaa 221 Setting the PrinterlD e a ao 221 Setting the Time andDate o o e 222 Contents Changing the Clock Mode o o e 222 Setting Sounds e 223 Speaker Volume o o e 223 Ringer Volumes lt 9 ee rs ed ds e git deh 223 Specifying the Fax Settings o o 223 Changing the Fax Settings Options 0 223 Available Fax Settings Options o o o 224 Sendinga Fak 4 3 2 4 2 a a 226 Sending a Fax Automatically 0 0000200008 226 Sending a Fax Manually 0 0 000002 eae 226 Setting Fax Options 2 2 ee 227 Confirming Transmissions o e e 228 Automatic Redialing o e e 228 Sending a Delayed Fax
19. 7 64 bit Edition Windows 8 Windows 8 64 bit Edition Windows 8 1 Windows 8 1 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2012 and Windows Server 2012 R2 K NOTE When the User Account Control dialog box appears during installation click Continue or Yes if you are an administrator on the computer otherwise contact your administrator to continue the desired action For Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64 bit Edition 1 oF Ww N oo N 0 10 11 12 13 Extract the following zip file to your desired location Ds Drivers XPS Win_7Vista XPS V3_E525w zip where D is the drive letter of the optical drive Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound gt Printers Click Add a printer Click Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer Select your printer or click The printer that I want isn t listed When you select your printer go to step 8 When you click The printer that I want isn t listed go to step 6 Select Add a printer using a TCP IP address or hostname and then click Next Select TCP IP Device for Device type and enter the IP address for Hostname or IP address and then click Next Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box Click Browse then select the extracted folder in step 1 and then click OK Select your printer name and click Next To change the printer name enter the printer name in the Printer
20. Click Continue on the Introduction screen Click Continue on the License screen and then click Agree Confirm the installation location and then click Install to perform the standard installation Enter the administrator s name and password and then click Install Software OK for Mac OS X 10 6 Click Continue Installation Click Restart to finish installing the software Connecting Your Computer to the Printer When Using a USB Connection 1 2 Turn on the printer Connect the USB cable between the printer and Macintosh computer The printer is automatically added to your Macintosh computer When Using Bonjour 1 2 60 Turn on the printer Ensure that your Macintosh computer is connected to the network If you use wired connection connect the Ethernet cable between the printer and the network If you use wireless connection ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer and printer For Mac OS X 10 6 Open the System Preferences and click Print amp Fax For OS X 10 7 and OS X 10 8 Open the System Preferences and click Print amp Scan For OS X 10 9 and OS X 10 10 Open the System Preferences and click Printers amp Scanners Click the Plus sign and select Add Printer or Scanner Add Other Printer or Scanner for OS X 10 7 For Mac OS X 10 6 just click the Plus sign Click Default and select the printer connected via Bonjour from the Name Printer Name for Mac
21. Output Tray Status Capacity Output Tray OK 7 150 sheets Cover Status Rear Cover Closed ADF Cover Closed v To fill out printer inventory reports requiring the asset tag number of all the printers in your area use the Printer Information feature in the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Enter the IP address of each printer on the network to display the asset tag number The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool feature also allows you to change the printer settings and keep track of printing trends Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Ensure that you activate JavaScript in your browser before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool It is recommended that you configure the environment settings of your web browser before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool K NOTE The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool pages may be unreadable if the language differs from that of your web browser Setting Up From Web Browser It is recommended that you configure both the environment settings of your web browser and the operator panel before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 75 For Internet Explorer Setting Up the Display Language 1 Select Internet Options from Tools on the menu bar 2 Select Languages in the General tab 3 Specify the display language in order of preference in the Language list For example gt Italian Italy it IT e Spanish
22. Printing You can also print a file by the following steps a Press the E Menu button b Ensure that Print From USB Memory is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until the desired file is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Select printing options as required Ensure that Start Print is highlighted and then press the gt Start button K NOTE Before removing the USB memory ensure that the printer is not accessing the USB memory If you remove the USB memory while the printer is accessing the data in the USB memory or the USB memory itself may be damaged Printing With Wi Fi Direct This section provides information for Wi Fi Direct printing Wi Fi Direct allows your Wi Fi mobile devices such as computers smart phone and tablets to connect to the printer directly via a Wi Fi network With Wi Fi Direct you can print documents photos or e mail on your Wi Fi mobile devices directly without a wireless access point N DDED EZ EZ NOTE Wi Fi Direct is available even if the printer is connected to your wireless network connection NOTE Only printing function is available via the Wi Fi Direct network NOTE You cannot connect your mobile device to the Internet via the Wi Fi Direct network of the printer NOTE The maximum number of devices that can be connected via the Wi Fi Direct network is one NOTE Depending on the device the channel used to connect the device to the printer v
23. RT and Windows RT 8 1 a Tap Devices in the PC settings menu b Tap Add a device in the Devices sub menu c Tap Dell_xxxxxx The printer is ready for use For Windows Vista and Windows 7 You need to install the printer driver on the mobile device See Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows on page 49 For iOS You need to install the printing application such as Mobile Print App for Dell and then the printer is ready for use For Android You need to install the printing application such as Dell Mobile Print and then the printer is ready for use Printing via Wi Fi Direct The printing procedure varies depending on your mobile device you are using Refer to the manual provided with your mobile device to print as you normally do from the device Disconnecting Wi Fi Direct Network 1 OO 01 FSF QQ N Press the E Menu button Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the Y button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the Y button until Network is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the Y button until Wi Fi Direct Setup is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Connection Status is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Select the device name to disconnect Printing 183 Select Disconnect and then press the Y Set button The selected dev
24. o 59 10 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh S N e Bok t s wtene a std flu s athe dat als ues 60 Installing the Drivers and Software 60 Connecting Your Computer to the Printer 60 When Using a USB Connection o o e 60 When Using Bonjour o ee 60 When Using IP Printing o o o o 61 11 Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers CUPS 62 Operation on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 1 Desktop 62 SOTUpDVEVIEW s Teee ei a a soe be aS 62 Installing the Printer Driver o o o o o o o 62 Setting Up the Queue o o e e 62 Setting the Default Queue o o e e 63 Specifying the Printing Options o o 63 Uninstalling the Printer Driver o o e 63 Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 64 Setup Overview s s sooren sn a a aa a 64 Installing the Printer Driver o o a 64 Setting Up the Queue o o e 64 Setting the Default Queue 0 o o e e 65 Specifying the Printing Options 0 000000 eae 65 Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator 66 Uninstalling the Printer Driver o o o 66 Operation on Ubuntu 12 04 LTS o o 67 Setup
25. 187 Printing From Google Chrome The following procedure uses the Google Chrome browser on a Windows PC as an example 1 Open the Google Chrome browser 2 Open the web page or e mail that you want to print 3 Click A or varies depending on the version of the Google Chrome browser in the top right corner and then click Print Click Change in the Destination area Choose your printer from the Google Cloud Print area Click Print Printing a Report Page You can print various types of reports and lists For details about how to print reports or lists see Report List on page 128 188 Printing Copying K NOTE If the Function Enabled setting for COPY is setto On Password you need to enter the four digit password to use the copy function If the Function Enabled setting for COPY is set to Of f the copy function is disabled For details see Function Enabled on page 158 Loading Paper for Copying The instructions for loading print documents are the same whether you are printing faxing or copying For more details see Loading Print Media on page 168 Preparing a Document You can use the document glass or the Automatic Document Feeder ADE to load an original document for copying scanning and sending a fax You can load up to 15 sheets of 75 g m 20 lb documents for one job using the ADF or one sheet at a time using the document glass AN WARNING Avoid loading documents that are smaller than 5 83 in
26. 3 Press the Y button until Report List is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 4 Press the V button until Address Book is highlighted and then press the Y Set button A list of your speed dial and group dial entries is printed Other Ways to Fax Using the Secure Receiving Mode You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people You can turn on the secure fax mode using the Secure Receive option to restrict printing out all of the received faxes when the printer is unattended In the secure fax mode all incoming faxes will get saved in the memory When the mode turns off any faxes stored will be printed K NOTE Before operation ensure that Panel Lock Set is setto Enable To turn the secure receiving mode on 1 Press the El Menu button Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the vA Set button Press the V button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Secure Settings is highlighted and then press they Set button Press the W button until Secure Receive is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Secure Receive Set is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Enable is highlighted and then press the if Set button K NOTE The factory default password is 0000 8 To return to the standby mode press the E Menu button u 0 0d Eh W N W
27. 8 Windows 8 1 Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2012 R2 Mac OS X 10 6 OS X 10 7 OS X 10 8 OS X 10 9 and OS X 10 10 and works with various scanners K NOTE Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer using the Ethernet or USB cable 1 Load the document s face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document s in first OR Place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 or Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 Start the graphic software such as Adobe Photoshop From the software select the command that starts the scanning and then select the printer as a scanner The procedure for selecting the scan start command varies depending on the software For details see the manual supplied with the software 4 Select your scanning preferences and click Preview to display the preview image K NOTE Preview is available only when you place a document on the document glass K NOTE The illustration may vary for different operating systems Dell Color MFP E525w Scanner USB mem Basic Scanning image Qualty Image Options a Pues y OR 600 1200 1800 2400 Scan From al Document Glass y Image Type raco a Scan Size Letter 8 5 x 11 in y Resolution A 200 api
28. 9 or 16 pages Combined with the duplex setting Multiple Up allows you to print up to 32 pages on one sheet of paper 16 images on the front and 16 on the back Storing Print Media To avoid potential paper feeding problems and uneven print quality there are several things you can do e To achieve the best possible print quality store print media in an environment where the temperature is approximately 21 C 70 F and the relative humidity is 40 e Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf rather than directly on the floor e If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton ensure that they rest on a flat surface so the edges do not buckle or curl e Do not place anything on top of the print media packages Maintaining Your Printer 261 Storing Consumables Store consumables in their original packaging until you need to use them Do not store consumables in Temperatures greater than 40 C 104 F e An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature e Direct sunlight Dusty places e Acar fora long period of time e An environment where corrosive gases are present e An environment with salty air Replacing Toner Cartridges AN WARNING Before replacing toner cartridges read and follow the safety instructions in the mportant Information Dell toner cartridges are available only through Dell You can order more cartridges online at http www dell com supplies
29. Displays the device name that identifies the Wi Fi Direct network Device Name Understanding the Printer Menus 139 Connection No Entry Indicates that no device is available Status HOST xxxxxx Displays the connected device name and current status of the Wi Fi Direct network Disconnect Disconnect the device Reset Passphrase Disconnect the device and reset passphrase Current Role Client Displays the current group role of the printer Current SSID Displays the current SSID Confirm it when you select the Wi Fi Direct network on your mobile device SSID Specifies a name to identify the wireless network PassPhrase Print Passphrase Prints the passphrase Confirm it when you enter the passphrase to your mobile device Reset Passphrase Cancel Start WPS Method Push Button Configuration Configures the Wi Fi Direct network with WPS PBC PIN Code Configures the Wi Fi Direct network with PIN code assigned automatically by the printer Reset Wireless Purpose To initialize wireless network settings After executing this function and rebooting the printer all wireless network settings are reset to their default values No Does not reset the wireless setting Yes Resets the wireless setting K NOTE This item is available only when the Ethernet cable is disconnected and Wi Fi is setto On TCP IP Purpose To configure TCP IP settings The change takes effect after the printer i
30. Ensure that Apply Settings is highlighted and then press the Y Set button When Are You Sure is displayed ensure that Yes is highlighted and then press the V Set button To store more fax numbers repeat steps 6 to 12 To return to the previous screen press the 5 Back button Sending a Fax Using Speed Dial 1 Load the document s face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document s in first OR Place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 or Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 Press the lt gt Fax button Specify a fax number using speed dial Speed dial enables you to quickly and easily specify destinations by selecting or searching from a list of destinations registered in the Phone Book or in an LDAP server You can also directly specify destinations by entering the speed dial numbers or pressing the One Touch Dial buttons To select destinations directly by entering the speed dial numbers a Pressthe V button until Speed Dial is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Faxing 235 b Enter the speed dial number 01 to 99 using the numeric keypad and then press the Y Set button Entering the asterisk enables you to search and display multiple destinations at a time For example if you enter 0 the speed dial numbers beginning with 0 are called up
31. Pages Collate ER 11 2 2 3 3 a o Gad 4 The Printing Preferences dialog box appears Specify the fax settings For more information click Help of the driver Y NOTE The settings done here are only applied to a single fax job Basic Qualty Image Orientation Standard 203x 98 DPI y ena ranas O landscape l Fax Cover Page Settings Defaults a oe a 5 Click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box 6 Click Print The Set Check Fax Transmission dialog box appears 230 Faxing 7 Specify the destination for the recipient in one of the following ways Enter a name and phone number directly e Select a recipient from the Phone Book saved on your computer Select a recipient from a database other than the Phone Book For more information on how to specify the destination click Help of the driver Set Check Fax Transmssion Untitled Notepad Recipient Setting Name Recipient List PET Phone Number Name Phone Number My Phone Book File C Users iis hal A A ci v Add to Phone Book Look Up Phone Book Delayed Send Import and Add File Delayed Send Authorization Password 00 Start Sending Stop Sending Help K NOTE Enter the password in the Password field in the Authorization area before sending a fax if the Fax service is loc
32. RH no condensation Print Quality Guarantee Temperature 15 28 C Relative humidity 20 70 RH no condensation Storage Temperature range 0 35 C Storage humidity range 15 80 RH no condensation 256 Specifications Altitude Operating Up to 3 100 m 10 000 feet Storage 70 9275 Kpa K NOTE For more information on adjusting the altitude see Adjust Altitude on page 95 Cables Your interconnection cable must meet the following requirements Connection type Connection specifications and symbols 1 Ethernet 10 Base T 100 Base TX 2 USB USB 2 0 3 Wall Jack Connector LINE 4 Phone Connector PHONE Print Specifications Item Description Print resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi Print speed Simplex Color 18 ppm Black amp White 18 A4 Letter Paper size A4 B5 A5 Letter Executive Folio Legal Envelope 10 Monarch DL C5 Specifications 257 Copy Specifications Item Description Copy resolution Document glass 600 x 600 dots 25 4 mm 1 inch ADF 600 x 300 dots 25 4mm 1 inch Same for Color Black amp White Copy speed Color 18 cpm or more Black amp White 18 cpm or more When using the document glass to make sequential copies of a document with pages scanned one by one Color 7 cpm or more Black amp White 17 cpm or more When using the ADF to make sequential copies of multiple documents
33. Set button The printer restarts automatically to apply the settings Understanding the Printer Menus 161 Print Media Guidelines Print media can be paper labels envelopes and coated paper among others Your printer provides high quality printing on a variety of print media Selecting the appropriate print media for your printer helps avoid printing troubles This section describes selecting print media caring for print media and loading the print media in standard 150 sheet tray Paper For the best print quality in color use 75 g m 20 lb xerographic grain long paper For the best print quality in black and white use 90 g m 24 lb xerographic grain long paper Before buying large quantities of any print media it is recommended that you try a sample first When loading paper identify the recommended print side on the paper package and load the paper accordingly See Loading Print Media in the Standard 150 Sheet Tray on page 168 for detailed loading instructions Recommended Paper To ensure the best print quality and feed reliability use dry 75 g m 20 lb xerographic paper Business paper designed for general business use also provide acceptable print quality Only use paper having resistance to high temperature and without discoloring bleeding or releasing hazardous emissions The laser printing process heats paper to high temperatures Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the paper you have
34. Setting Copy Opti0NMS o o 191 Number of CopieS o o o 191 CODE S a Ren A e ds e tdo da MO La e EN ee 192 Callate ts ed tee aoe A eee thy fe do 192 Reduce Enlarge ee 193 DoCUMENTSIZE lt es sern a Re e 194 Original TYPE A A A A bt 194 Contents 9 10 Lighter Darkeri sso 30d ii t pa dd 195 Sharpness da a A ta coke ES 195 Auto EXPOSUTO ec a de a eS 196 M ltipl Ub 32 ia eel a ee eed 196 Margin Top Bottom o e 197 Margin Left Right o o o o 02000002 eee eee 198 Margin Middle 2 ti ral Ae ate eae ka E a A es 198 CopyinganIDCard 2 2 a 199 Changing the Default Settings 199 FONMSCAMMINGS s Rye A het ta hb mee 200 Scanning Overview aaau aa ee 200 Scanning From the Operator Panel Using an Application 200 Scanning From the Operator Panel Using Web Services on Devices WSD SA O A A AA A dd te de 201 Printer Setup for Scanning via Web Services on Devices WSD 201 Procedures for Scanning via Web Services on Devices WSD 201 Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver 202 Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition WIA Driver 203 Scanning to a Computer or Server viaSMB FTP 204 Overview iaa a e ad a a G 204 Confirming a Login Name and Password 4 206 Creating a Folder to Store the Document
35. chosen is acceptable for laser printers K NOTE Always print several samples before buying large quantities of any type of print media When choosing any print media you should consider the weight fiber content and color Unacceptable Paper The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer e Chemically treated paper used to make copies without carbon paper also known as carbonless paper carbonless copy paper CCP or no carbon required NCR paper e Preprinted paper with chemicals that may contaminate the printer e Preprinted paper that can be affected by the temperature in the fusing unit e Preprinted paper that require a registration the precise print location on the page greater than 0 09 inches such as optical character recognition OCR forms In some cases you can adjust registration with your software program to successfully print on these forms e Coated paper erasable bond synthetic paper thermal paper Rough edged rough or heavily textured surface paper or curled paper e Recycled paper containing more than 25 post consumer waste that do not meet DIN 19 309 e Multiple part forms or documents e Print quality may deteriorate blank spaces or blotches may appear in the text when printing on talc or acid paper e Moist paper that may cause wrinkle 162 Print Media Guidelines Selecting Paper Proper paper selection helps prevent jams and ensures trouble free printing To help avoid
36. d WhenAre You Sure is displayed ensure that Yes is highlighted and then press the V Set button To delete the group dial a Press the Backspace button b When Are You Sure is displayed ensure that Yes is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 7 Ifyou want to edit another group dial number repeat step 6 8 To return to the previous screen press the Back button Sending a Fax Using Group Dial Multi address Transmission 1 Load the document s face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document s in first OR Place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 or Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 2 Press the lt gt Fax button Specify a fax number using group dial You can specify destinations by selecting or searching from a list of destinations registered in the Phone Book To select destinations from Phone Book Press the Y button until Group Dial is highlighted and then press the Y Set button OR Press the aC Phone Book button Press the V button to move the cursor to the desired destination To check the detailed information of the destination press the button Press the Y Set button to select the destination and then press the gt button You can also directly find the destination by its group dial number Enter the number using the nu
37. select the Set as the default printer check box Installation starts If you do not share your printer select Do not share this printer If you share your printer select Share this printer so that others on your network can find and use it Click Next As the driver installation is completed click Print a test page to verify installation Click Finish For Windows 1 Windows 7 64 bit Edition or Windows Server 2008 R2 1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location D Drivers XPS Win_7Vista XPS V3_E525w zip where D is the drive letter of the optical drive 2 Click Start Devices and Printers 3 Click Add a printer 4 Click Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer 5 Select your printer or click The printer that I want isn t listed When you select your printer go to step 8 When you click The printer that I want isn t listed go to step 6 6 Select Add a printer using a TCP IP address or hostname and then click Next 7 Select TCP IP Device from Device type and enter the IP address for Hostname or IP address and then click Next Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box Click Browse then select the extracted folder in step 1 and then click OK 10 Select your printer name and click Next 11 To change the printer name enter the printer name in the Printer name text box and then click Next Installation starts 12 If you do not share your printer select Do not share this printer If yo
38. shorter than 220 mm Monarch or DL go to action 4b 4a Does the envelope have a flap on the long edge The envelope is The envelope is C5 Envelope 10 Go to action 5b Go to action 5a 4b Ensure that the envelope is properly loaded in the standard 150 sheet The task is complete tray For details see When Loading Envelope 10 DL or Monarch on Go to action 5b page 171 Is the problem recovered 5a Ensure that the envelope is properly loaded in the standard 150 sheet The task is complete Contact Dell tray For details see When Loading C5 on page 172 Is the problem recovered 5b Usea different size envelope The task is complete Contact Dell Is the problem recovered The Top Margins Are Incorrect ABC DEF Action Yes No 1 Ensure that the margins are set correctly on the application being used The task is complete Contact Dell Is the problem recovered 298 Troubleshooting Color Registration Is Out of Alignment ABC DEF Action Yes No 1 Execute auto color registration adjustment The task is complete a Launch the Tool Box and click Registration Adjustment on the Printer Maintenance tab b Clear the On check box for Auto Registration Adjustment c Click Start next to Auto Correct Is the problem recovered Go to action 2 2 Clean the CTD sensor The task is complete a Clean the CTD sensor See Cleaning the Color Toner
39. the printer monitors and takes the line if fax tones are received and then starts receiving the fax If the answering device is off the printer automatically goes into the fax receive mode after the ring tone sounds for a predefined time Using a Computer Modem 2 lt a o o i SS DA E Line Er LH Printer Telephone answering device Phone To the Internet Computer If you want to use your computer modem for faxing or for a dial up Internet connection connect the computer modem directly to the back of your printer with the TAD as shown above 240 Faxing Set your printer to the Ans Machine Fax mode and set Auto Rec Ans FAX to specify the time for the TAD Turn off the computer modem s fax receive feature Do not use the computer modem if your printer is sending or receiving a fax Follow the instructions provided with your computer modem and fax application to fax via the computer modem Printing a Report The following reports may be useful when using fax Address Book This list shows all the addresses currently stored in the memory of the printer as Address Book information Fax Activity This report shows information about the faxes you recently received or sent Protocol Monitor This report shows the status of the protocol when the latest fax was being sent Procedures 1 2 3 4 Press the E Menu button Press the V butt
40. with a password 6 Click Start Sending 232 Faxing Receiving a Fax About Receiving Modes There are five receiving modes Telephone Fax Telephone Fax Ans Machine Fax and DRPD K NOTE To use the Telephone Fax mode or Ans Machine Fax mode attach an external telephone or answering machine to the phone connector Y on the back of your printer Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes Faxes can only be printed on letter A4 or legal sized paper For details about loading paper see Loading Print Media on page 168 Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Fax Mode Your printer is preset to receive a fax automatically at the factory If you receive a fax the printer automatically goes into the fax receive mode after a specified period of time and receives the fax To change the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call see Available Fax Settings Options on page 224 Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode To receive a fax manually pick up the handset of the external telephone and follow the instructions below 1 Press the lt gt Fax button when you hear fax tones on the external telephone Off Hook appears Press the gt Start button Press the Y button until Manual Receive is highlighted and then press the Y Set button The printer receives the document Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Telephone Fax or Ans Machine Fax Mode To use the Telephone F
41. you are required by law to indicate your fax number on any fax you send The printer ID containing your telephone number and name or company name will be printed at the top of each page sent from your printer 1 Press the El Menu button 2 Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 3 Press the V button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 4 Press the V button until Fax Settings is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 5 Press the V button until Fax Number is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 6 Enter your fax number using the number keypad K NOTE If you make a mistake while entering numbers press the Backspace button to delete the last digit Press the Y Set button when the number on the display is correct Press the A button until Fax Header Name is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Enter your name or company name using the numeric keypad Faxing 221 You can enter alphanumeric characters using the numeric keypad including special symbols by pressing the 1 and buttons For details on how to use the numeric keypad to enter alphanumeric characters see Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters on page 73 10 Press the Y Set button when the name on the display is correct 11 To return to the previous screen press the Back button Setting the Time and Date K NOTE It may be necessary t
42. you send using the ADE Clean the ADF glass See Cleaning the Scanner on page 272 The printer dials a number but the connection with another fax machine fails 302 Troubleshooting The other fax machine may be turned off out of paper or cannot answer incoming calls Speak with the other machine operator and ask her him to sort out the problem Problem Action Documents are not stored in the memory There may not be enough memory to store the document If the display shows a Memory Full message delete any documents you no longer need from the memory and then restore the document or wait for the job in progress e g a fax transmission or reception to complete Blank areas appear at the bottom of each page or on other pages with a small strip of text at the top You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting See Print Media Guidelines on page 162 The printer will not send or receive faxes Ensure that the country code is set correctly under E Menu gt System gt Admin Menu gt Fax Settings gt Country Check that the phone line is connected properly See Connecting the Telephone Line on page 35 An error often occurs during a fax transmission or reception Reduce the modem speed under E Menu gt System gt Admin Menu gt Fax Settings gt Modem Speed Scanning Problems Problem Action The scanner does not work Ensure tha
43. 14 To return to the previous screen press the Back button Editing Group Dial You can delete a specific speed dial number from a selected group or add a new number to the selected group Press the E Menu button Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the W button until Phone Book is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Group Dial is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until the group dial number that you want to edit is highlighted and then press the V Set button oot A U N To change the group dial name a Ensure that Name is highlighted and then press the Y Set button b Enter a new name and then press the Y Set button c Press the V button until Apply Settings is highlighted and then press the Y Set button d WhenAre You Sure is displayed ensure that Yes is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Faxing 237 To change the speed dial number Press the V button until Speed Dial No is highlighted and then press the v Set button a b Press the V button to move the cursor to the speed dial number you want to edit press the Y Set button to select or deselect the number and then press the gt button c Press the V button until Apply Settings is highlighted and then press the Y Set button
44. 220 x 110 mm C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm Custom Size Portrait Y 297 mm 11 7 inch Specifies the length of the custom size Available Range Peper 127 355 mm 5 0 14 0 inches Landscape X 210 mm 8 3 inch Specifies the width of the custom size Available Range paper 77 215 mm 3 0 8 5 inches Paper Type Plain Plain Thick Covers Coated Label Recycled Envelope Plain S2 Plain Thick S2 Covers S2 Coated S2 Recycled S2 Display Popup Off Does not display a popup menu On Displays a popup menu that prompts the user to set the paper size and type when paper is loaded in the standard 150 sheet tray 1 The default varies depending on country specific factory default K NOTE For more information on supported paper sizes see Supported Paper Sizes on page 166 Understanding the Printer Menus 127 Report List Use this menu to print various types of reports and lists K NOTE A password is required to enter Report ListwhenPanel Lock Set is setto Enable In this case enter the password you specified and press the y Set button System Settings Purpose To print a list of the information such as the printer name serial number print volume and the network settings Panel Settings Purpose To print a detailed list of all the settings on the operator panel menus PCL Fonts List Purpose To print a sample of the available PCL fonts PS Fonts List Purpose To print a sample of the available
45. 24 Turn off and turn on the printer Tool Box K NOTE When you use the IPv6 mode for network printing the Tool Box cannot be used to assign an IP address 1 44 Click Start gt All Programs gt Dell Printers gt Dell Printer Hub Dell Printer Hub opens Select Dell Color MFP E525w print driver at My Printers Click on the link Tool Box from list at the left side of the page K NOTE The Select Printer dialog box opens in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the desired printer name listed in Printer Name The Tool Box opens Click the System Settings tab Select Printer Information and Settings from the list at the left side of the page Click TCP IP Settings The TCP IP Settings page is displayed Select Panel from IP Address Mode and then enter the values in IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address Click Apply New Settings Setting the IP Address Verifying the IP Address You can confirm the IP address of the printer by using the operator panel or printing the system settings To verify that the address is active on the network you can use the PING command from your computer K NOTE A password is required to enter Admin Menu when Panel Lock Set is setto Enable In this case enter the password you specified and press the V Set button Operator Panel 1 u oooO A amp N Press the E Menu button Press the V button until Syste
46. 7 OS X 10 8 OS X 10 9 and OS X 10 10 1 2 3 4 Click System Preferences gt Users amp Groups Accounts for Mac OS X 10 6 Select Change Password Enter a password for your user login account in New password Re enter the password in Verify After you confirmed a login user name and password go to Creating a Folder to Store the Document on page 207 When Using FTP The Scan to Network Folder feature requires a user name and a password For your user name and password contact your system administrator Creating a Folder to Store the Document When Using SMB Share a folder to store the scanned document using the following procedure For Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2012 and Windows Server 2012 R2 1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer Example of folder name MyShare 2 Right click the folder and then select Properties d New Folder Properties x General Sharing Security Previous Versions Customize Network File and Folder Sharing j New Folder Not Shared Network Path Not Shared Advanced Sharing Set custom permissions create multiple shares and set other advanced sharing options P Advanced Sharing Password Protection People must have a user account and password for this computer to access shared folders To change this setting use the Network and Sharing Cente
47. 7 Login Name Enter the user account name that has access to the shared folder on your computer or FTP server 8 Login Password Enter the password corresponding to the above login name NOTE Empty password is not valid when scanned documents are sent via the SMB protocol Ensure that you have a valid password for the user login account See Confirming a Login Name and Password on page 206 for details on how to add a password in your user login account 9 Re enter Password Re enter your password After you configured settings go to Sending the Scanned File to a Computer or Server on page 215 From the Address Book Editor Click Start gt All Programs gt Dell Printers gt Dell Printer Hub 1 Dell Printer Hub opens Select Dell Color MFP E525w print driver at My Printers Click on the link Address Book Editor from list at the left side of the page The Select Device window appears 212 Scanning Select your printer from the list Click OK 6 Click Tool gt New Device Address Book gt Server El Address Book Editor Dell Color MFP E525w Fax USB Ele Edit View Tool Help Wenig Ne Device Ascres Book Fa E Mail gt bal New PC Fax Address Book Server a Search Register Updated On AddressBod cy Devic E Mail Message Settings Fax E Mail Server S PC Fax Address Book Entry Data 0 Group Data 0 The Server Address dialog box
48. Adjust the setting for the type of print media being used Is the problem recovered The task is complete Go to action 2 2 Ifyou use non recommended print media use the print media recommended for the printer Is the problem recovered The task is complete Contact Dell 294 Troubleshooting Ghosting ABC pi 16 Action Yes 1 Adjust the transfer bias a Launch the Tool Box and click Registration Adjustment on the Printer Maintenance tab b Click Chart Print c Click Ghost Configuration Chart The ghost configuration chart is printed d Click Adjust Transfer Roller e Select the Transfer Roller Refresh Mode check box and then click Apply New Settings f Click Registration Adjustment on the Printer Maintenance tab g Click Chart Print h Click Ghost Configuration Chart The ghost configuration chart is printed Is the problem recovered The task is complete Go to action 2 2 The print media surface may be uneven Try changing the Paper Type setting in the printer driver For example change the plain paper to thick a On the General or Paper Output tab in Printing Preferences of the printer driver change the Paper Type setting Is the problem recovered The task is complete Go to action 3 3 Adjust the fusing unit temperature a Launch the Tool Box and click Adjust Fusing Unit on the Printer Maintenance tab b Adjust the fixing temperatur
49. Available Range 3 3 Plain Thick 0 Available Range 3 3 Covers 0 Available Range 3 3 Coated 0 Available Range 3 3 Label 0 Available Range 3 3 Recycled 0 Available Range 3 3 Envelope 0 Available Range 3 3 Auto Regi Adjust Purpose To specify whether to automatically adjust color registration Values Off Does not automatically adjust color registration On Automatically adjusts color registration Adjust ColorRegi Purpose To automatically adjust color registration Color registration adjustments need to be made during the initial setup of the printer or when the printer is moved to a different location K NOTE This item is available only when Auto Regi Adjust is setto Off Values Auto Adjust Yes Automatically adjusts color registration No Does not automatically adjust color registration Understanding the Printer Menus 155 Clean Developer Purpose To rotate the developer motor and stir the toner in the toner cartridge Values Yes Stirs the toner in a new toner cartridge No Does not stir the toner in a new toner cartridge Toner Refresh Purpose To use up a toner cartridge when you need to replace it before the end of its life or to stir the toner in a new toner cartridge Values Yellow Yes Cleans the toner in the yellow toner cartridge No Does not clean the toner in the ye
50. CUPS This section provides information for installing or setting up the printer driver with CUPS Common UNIX Printing System on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 1 Desktop SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 and Ubuntu 12 04 Operation on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 1 Desktop Setup Overview 1 Install the printer driver 2 Set up the print queue 3 Specify the default queue 4 Specify the printing options Installing the Printer Driver 1 Select Applications System Tools gt Terminal 2 Enter the following command in the terminal window su Enter the administrator password rpm ivh Enter the file path Dell Color MFP E525w x x x noarch rpm The printer driver is installed Setting Up the Queue To execute printing you must set up the print queue on your workstation 1 Open the URL http localhost 631 using a web browser 2 Click Administration 3 Click Add Printer 4 Enter root as the user name enter the administrator password and click OK For network connections a Select LPD LPR Host or Printer from the Other Network Printers menu and click Continue b Enter the IP address of the printer in Connection and click Continue Format lpd xxx xxx xxx xxx the IP address of the printer For USB connections a Select your printer name from the Local Printers menu and click Continue 5 Enter the name of the printer in the Name text box in the Add Printer window and click Continue You can optionally specify the locat
51. Displays the Address Book menu for e mail addresses Y Redial Pause button e Calls up the last called number e Pauses a telephone number X Cancel button e Cancels the current processing or pending job e Resets the current setting and returns to the top menu Operator Panel 12 B amp W Color LED e Lights up to indicate which color mode is selected 13 Color Mode button Switches between color mode and black and white mode 14 gt Start button e Starts the job 15 ID Copy button e Shortcuts to the ID Card Copy screen 16 EC Phone Book button e Displays stored telephone numbers in the Phone Book 17 Numeric keypad e Enters characters and numbers 18 Backspace button e Deletes characters and numbers 19 Back button Returns to the previous screen 20 LCD Panel e Displays various settings instructions and error messages 21 gt Scan button e Displays the Scan menu 22 E Menu button e Displays the Print from USB Memory Job Status and System menus 23 Wi Fi WPS button Starts Wi Fi Protected Setup Push Button Configuration Lights up when it is activated and blinks in certain conditions K NOTE Displaying a different menu or returning to a previous screen cancels the current entry or setting Make sure to press the Y Set button to save the current entry or setting K NOTE For details on how to use the numeric keypad to enter alphanumeric characters see Usin
52. E Mail Alert Magenta Cartridge Level 99 Set Password ee eel Yellow Cartridge Level 96 Order Supplies at Black Cartridge Level 97 www dell com supplies es Contact Dell Support at eet ee Paper Trays Status Capacity Size Multipurpose Feeder No Cassette 150 shoots A4 210 x 207 mm Output Tray Status Capacity Output Tray OK 50 sheets Cover Status Rear Cover E ADF Cover torent v 1 Dell Color MFP E525w Displays the printer model name 2 IP Address Displays the IP address of your printer 3 Location Displays the location of the printer The location can be changed in the Basic Information on the Print Server Settings page 4 Contact Person Displays the administrator name of the printer The name can be changed in the Basic Information on the Print Server Settings page 5 Printer Bitmap Shows the bitmap image of the printer The Printer Status menu appears in the right frame when you click the image 18 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Left Frame The left frame is located on the left side of all pages The menu titles displayed in the left frame are linked to corresponding menus and pages You can go to the corresponding page by clicking their characters The following menus are displayed in the left frame 16 g P c Ee ETA 1 Per Color MFP E525w 5 2N 3 AN Printer Status N 5 in Server Settin
53. Location A te Contact Person Printer Jobs as Printer Settings Print server Setings EERE reses ETE eau Osi fowatin Port Seis kes LAN WEF Direc TCP T SNMP STP P Dos ENS Sogou xt ias oa Scan to PC E Mail Alert Proxy Server AirPrint Reset Print Server Prista Informatori Basic Information Ag Retesh Tray Settings System Settings E Mail Alert Printer Name E PEENE Location Conc Person E Online Help Administrator E Mail Address AAA Order Suppiesat Assen number www dell com supplies EWS Settings Contact Dell Supportat auto Retresn Eon y sentida Auto Refresh Interval Bo seconds 18 600 Web Page Title Internet Services Y Apply NewSatings Restore Settings 1 Refresh button Receives the current printer configuration and updates the latest information in the right frame 2 Apply New Settings button Submits new settings made on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to the printer The new settings replace the old settings of the printer 3 Restore Settings button Restores the old settings New settings will not be submitted to the printer 80 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Changing the Settings of the Menu Items Some menus allow you to change the printer settings through the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool When you access these menus the authentication window appears on the screen Enter a user name and password of the administrator by following the prompts displayed in the dialog b
54. OS X 10 6 and OS X 10 7 list Name and Use Print Using for Mac OS X 10 6 and OS X 10 7 are automatically entered Make sure that your printer name is selected for Use or Print Using Click Add Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh When Using IP Printing 1 2 Turn on the printer Ensure that your Macintosh computer is connected to the network If you use wired connection connect the Ethernet cable between the printer and the network If you use wireless connection ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer and printer For Mac OS X 10 6 Open the System Preferences and click Print amp Fax For OS X 10 7 and OS X 10 8 Open the System Preferences and click Print amp Scan For OS X 10 9 and OS X 10 10 Open the System Preferences and click Printers amp Scanners Click the Plus sign and select Add Printer or Scanner Add Other Printer or Scanner for OS X 10 7 For Mac OS X 10 6 just click the Plus sign Click IP and select Line Printer Daemon LPD for Protocol Enter the IP address for the printer in the Address area Select your printer name for Use Print Using for Mac OS X 10 6 and OS X 10 7 K NOTE When the printing is set up using IP printing the queue name is displayed as blank You do not need to specify it Click Add Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh 61 Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers
55. Overview ooo nr ee ee Fe eRe 67 Installing the Printer Driver 20 22202000005 67 Setting Up the Queue o o eee eee 67 Setting the Default Queue o 68 Specifying the Printing Options 0 o o eae 68 Uninstalling the Printer Driver o o e 68 Contents 5 Using Your Printer o ad pot a ba 69 6 12 Operator Panel cc aa orsedie paraa dec 70 Using the Operator Panel Buttons o 10 Status of Wi Fi WPS Button Backlight 72 Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters 13 Keypad Letters and Numbers o o 13 Changing Numbers or Names 13 Inserting a Pause o o 13 Printing a Panel Settings Page 14 Changing the Language 14 Operator Panel si i es ia is A 74 TOO BOX ues ee a we Pe a ee eee ee es 74 Setting the Power Saver Timer Option 74 13 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 75 Overview S shes ee NER toe eel SE ole oe ta Sae 75 Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 15 Setting Up From Web Browser o o e eee 15 Setting Up From Operator Panel o o 16 Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 16 Overview ofthe Menu Items o
56. PS fonts Job History Purpose To print a detailed list of the print copy fax or scan jobs that have been processed This list contains the last 50 jobs Error History Purpose To print a detailed list of paper jams and fatal errors Color Test Page Purpose To print a page for testing colors Protocol Monitor Purpose To print a detailed list of monitored protocols Address Book Purpose To print the list of all addresses stored as Address Book information Fax Activity Purpose To print the report of faxes you recently received or sent 128 Understanding the Printer Menus Stored Documents List K NOTE Stored Documents feature is available only when RAM Disk under System Settings is enabled Purpose To print a list of all files stored for Secure Print in the RAM disk Printing a Report List Using the Operator Panel 1 Press the E Menu button 2 Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 3 Press the V button until Report List is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 4 Press the V button until the desired report or list is highlighted and then press the Y Set button The selected report or list is printed Printing a Report List Using the Tool Box 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Dell Printers gt Dell Printer Hub Dell Printer Hub opens Select Dell Color MFP E525w print driver at My Printers Click on the link Tool Box from list at the
57. Press the W button until Preferences is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Lighter Darker is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the gt or lt button to select the desired settings and then press the Y Set button K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Lighter2 Makes the copy lighter than the original Works well with dark print Lighterl Normal Works well with standard typed or printed documents Darkerl Makes the copy darker than the original Works well with light print or faint pencil markings Darker2 Sharpness To adjust the sharpness to make the copy sharper or softer than the original 1 oa Aa W N Load the document s face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document s in first OR Place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 or Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 Press the Bo Copy button Press the V button until Preferences is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Sharpness is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button to select the desired settings and then press the Y Set button K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Sharpest Mak
58. Release the cover above the standard 150 sheet tray Clearing Paper Jams From the Back of the Printer AN WARNING Before performing any of the following procedures read and follow the safety instructions in the mportant Information A WARNING To prevent electric shock always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from the grounded outlet before performing maintenance AN WARNING To avoid burns do not clear paper jams immediately after printing The fusing unit becomes extremely hot during use K NOTE To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel you must clear all print media from the print media path 1 Push the rear cover release handle and open the rear cover 282 Clearing Jams 2 Lift up the levers 3 Remove any jammed paper from the back of the printer 4 Lower the levers to their original position Clearing Jams 283 5 Close the rear cover Clearing Paper Jams From the Output Tray A WARNING Before performing any of the following procedures read and follow the safety instructions in the mportant Information A WARNING To prevent electric shock always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from the grounded outlet before performing maintenance A WARNING To avoid burns do not clear paper jams immediately after printing The fusing unit becomes extremely hot during use Z NOTE To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel you must clear all
59. TC 09 00 Tokyo TC 09 00 Yakutsk TC 10 00 Sakhalin Vladivostok TC 11 00 Magadan TC 12 00 Anadyr Kamchatka Atlantic Ocean TC 04 00 Bermuda TC 04 00 Stanley TC 02 South Georgia Island 00 TC 01 00 Azores Scoresbysund TC 01 00 Cape Verde TC Reykjavik 40 Setting Up Your Printer Geographic Region Time Zone Pacific Ocean TC 11 00 Midway Island Niue Samoa Australia UTC 08 00 Perth UTC 08 45 Eucla UTC 09 30 Adelaide UTC 09 30 Darwin UTC 10 00 Brisbane Lindeman UTC 10 00 Hobart Melbourne Sydney UTC 10 30 Lord Howe Island Europe UTC Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London UTC 01 00 Amsterdam Berlin Rome Stockholm Vienna UTC 01 00 Belgrade Bratislava Budapest Prague UTC 01 00 Brussels Copenhagen Madrid Paris UTC 01 00 Sarajevo Skopje Warsaw Zagreb UTC 02 00 Athens Bucharest Istanbul UTC 02 00 Helsinki Kiev Riga Sofia UTC 02 00 Kaliningrad Minsk UTC 03 00 Moscow UTC 04 00 Samara Indian Ocean UTC 03 00 Antananarivo Comoro Islands Mayotte UTC 04 00 Mahe Reunion UTC 04 00 Mauritius UTC 05 00 Kerguelen Maldives UTC 06 00 Chagos UTC 06 30 Cocos Islands UTC 07 00 Christmas Island l l TC 10 00 Cook Islands Hawaii Tahiti
60. UTC 09 30 Marquesas Islands TC 08 00 Pitcairn Islands TC 06 00 Easter Island TC 09 00 Gambier Islands TC 09 00 Palau TC 10 00 Guam Port Moresby Saipan l U l UTC 06 00 Galapagos Islands U U U TC 11 00 Efate Guadalcanal Kosrae UTC 11 30 Norfolk Island UTC 12 00 Auckland UTC 12 00 Fiji Marshall Islands UTC 12 45 Chatham UTC 13 00 Tongatapu UTC 14 00 Kiritimati Setting Up Your Printer 41 Ensure that Please Enter Date appears Specify the current date and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Please Enter Time appears Specify the current time and then press the Y Set button 7 Press the Y Set button for specifying fax settings If you want to skip the steps for specifying fax settings press the gt Start button and then restart the printer 8 Ensure that Please Enter Fax Number appears Enter your fax number and then press the Y Set button 9 Ensure that Enter Fax Header Name appears Enter a name and then press the Y Set button 10 Press the Y Set button and then restart the printer Printer Setup Using the Software and Documentation Disc 1 Insert the Software and Documentation disc into your computer to start Dell Printer Easy Install 2 Double click the Dell Color MFP E525w Installer icon and follow the on screen instructions to connect the computer and the
61. a note of the value 5 5 indicated by the straightest line for each color When the value is 0 for each color you do not need to adjust the color registration 270 Maintaining Your Printer When the value is not 0 enter the value according to the procedure in Entering Values on page 271 RV 24 7 l PIO RI os M wgagronangy LETUT ON qa LY LM LC RY RM RC 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 o o o 0 0 o 44A 4 A4 4 4 Z 2 2 2 2 a 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 3 5 5 E i ey Entering Values Tool Box Using the Tool Box enter the values that you found in the color registration chart to make adjustments 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Dell Printers gt Dell Printer Hub Dell Printer Hub opens Select Dell Color MFP E525w print driver at My Printers Click on the link Tool Box from list at the left side of the page K NOTE The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the desired printer name listed in Printer Name The Tool Box opens Click the Printer Maintenance tab Select Registration Adj
62. a trusted certificate authority Uploading a Signed Certificate After you have received the signed certificate from a trusted certificate authority upload the signed certificate to the printer You can also upload an external certificate such as PKCS 12 that you created without using the CSR from the printer K NOTE The maximum number of digital certificates that you can upload is one 1 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser For more information see Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool on page 75 Click Print Server Settings Click the Security tab gt SSL TLS Click Upload Signed Certificate The Upload Signed Certificate page is displayed Click Choose File of File Name and then select the file to be uploaded To upload a PKCS 12 digital certificate you also need to enter the password that is set on the certificate in Password and Re enter Password Click Import Using Digital Certificates 245 Ma naging the Digital Certificate You can confirm or delete a digital certificate set on the printer Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate 1 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser For more information see Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool on page 75 Click Print Server Settings Click the Security tab gt SSL TLS Click Certificate Management
63. access to the printer Address Specifies the IP addresses that are permitted or denied access to the printer Enter a numeric value between 0 and 255 in each field Address Mask Specifies the subnet mask that are permitted or denied access to the printer Enter a numeric value between 0 and 255 in each field Active Mode Accept Permits printing from specified network address Reject Rejects printing from specified network address Off Disables the IP Filter feature for the specified IP address Print Volume Use this menu to verify the number of printed pages Values Printer Page Count Displays the total number of pages printed since the printer was shipped from the factory Paper Used Displays the number of pages printed for each paper size Address Book This menu contains the Fax E mail and Server Address pages Fax E mail This page contains the following subpages Address Book Allows you to view edit or create Address Book entries Fax Group Allows you to view edit or create fax group entries E mail Group Allows you to view edit or create e mail group entries E mail Default Setup Allows you to view edit or set the default e mail subject and message Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 111 Address Book Top Page Purpose To view the Address Book entries registered on the Address Book page Values Address List to Selecting each button displays a list of
64. also Paper Size on page 130 and Orientation on page 131 Quantity Purpose To specify the number of copies to print Values Available Range The values are in increments of 1 1 999 1 Draft Mode Purpose To save toner by printing in the draft mode The print quality is reduced when you print in the draft mode Values Disable Does not print in the draft mode Enable Prints in the draft mode Line Termination Purpose To add the line termination commands Values Off The line termination command is not added CR CR LF LE FF FF Add CR The CR command is added CR CR LF CR LE FF CR FF Add LF The LF command is added CR CR LE LF LE FF FF CR XX The CR and LF commands are added CR CR LE LF CR LF FF CR FF Output Color Purpose To specify the color mode to color or black and white Values Color Prints in the color mode Works well with texts and photos Black amp White Prints in the black and white mode Works well with texts 134 Understanding the Printer Menus PS Settings Use this menu to change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PostScript 3 Compatible printer language PS Error Report Purpose To specify whether to print the contents of PostScript 3 Compatible errors The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again Values On Prints an error report before it discards the job Of
65. and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 Press the B Copy button To specify the copy options below press the W button until Preferences is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Lighter Darker Sharpness e Auto Exposure e Color For details about copy options see Setting Copy Options on page 191 Press the V button until Start ID Copy is highlighted and then press the Y Set button After the front side of the ID card is scanned the display prompts you to turn it over a To scan the rear side of the ID card turn it over and press the V button until Continue is highlighted and then press the y Set button b To finish copying without scanning the rear side of the ID card press the V button until Print Now is highlighted and then press the Y Set button or the gt Start button K NOTE You can shortcut by pressing the ID Copy button on the operator panel K NOTE If the Function Enabled setting for COPY is setto On Color Password you need to enter the four digit password to start copying in color For details see Function Enabled on page 158 Changing the Default Settings The COPY menu options including contrast and image quality can be set as your commonly used modes When you copy a document the default settings are used unless they are changed by using the corresponding buttons on the operator panel
66. and the device See Disconnecting Wi Fi Direct Network on page 183 The printer cannot disconnect from the device even when the procedure in Disconnecting Wi Fi Direct Network has been performed The device may be automatically reconnecting to the printer Reset the passphrase for Wi Fi Direct and disconnect the device See Resetting the Passphrase on page 184 The network mode of the printer cannot be set to Ad hoc Ensure that Wi Fi Direct is set to Disable Wi Fi Direct cannot be set to Enable Ensure that the network mode is set to Infrastructure Scanner Driver Printer Utility Problems Problem Action Unable to retrieve the Address Book data from the printer on the Address Book Editor Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly connected with the Ethernet or USB cable Ensure that the printer s power is on Ensure that the printer driver is installed on your computer The Address Book Editor retrieves the Address Book data via the printer driver The TWAIN driver cannot connect to the printer Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly connected with the Ethernet or USB cable Check whether the printer is on If the printer is on reboot it by turning the power switch off and then on again If a scan application is running close the application once restart the application and then try scanning again Wireless Problems Pr
67. browser For more information see Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool on page 75 2 Click Print Server Settings 3 Click the Security tab gt SSL TLS 4 Confirm that the Enabled check box of SSL TLS Server Communication is selected and then click Apply New 5 Settings Settings have been changed Restart printer for new settings to take effect is displayed K NOTE If Disabled is displayed for SSL TLS Server Communication the digital certificate is not set For details see Setting a Digital Certificate on page 244 Click Restart Printer Enabling the SSL TLS Communication Between the Printer and an LDAP Server 1 5 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser For more information see Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool on page 75 Click Print Server Settings Click the Security tab gt SSL TLS Select the Enabled check box of LDAP SSL TLS Communication and then click Apply New Settings Settings have been changed Restart printer for new settings to take effect is displayed Click Restart Printer Enabling the SSL TLS Communication Between the Printer and an SMTP Server 1 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser For more information see Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool on page 75 Click Print Server Settings Click the Security tab gt SSL TLS Select t
68. by 8 27 in 148 0 mm by 210 0 mm or larger than 8 5 in by 14 in 215 9 mm by 355 6 mm different sizes or weights together or booklets pamphlets transparencies or documents having other unusual characteristics in ADF A WARNING Carbon paper or carbon backed paper coated paper onion skin or thin paper wrinkled or creased paper curled or rolled paper or torn paper cannot be used in ADF A WARNING Do not use the documents with staples paper clips or exposed to adhesives or solvent based materials such as glue ink and correcting fluid in ADF K NOTE To get the best scan quality especially for color or grayscale images use the document glass instead of the ADF Making Copies From the Document Glass Z NOTE A computer connection is not required for copying K NOTE Ensure that no document is in the ADF If any document is detected in the ADF it takes priority over the document on the document glass K NOTE Contaminants on the document glass may cause black spots on the printed paper For best results clean the document glass before use For more information see Cleaning the Scanner on page 272 Copying 189 To make a copy from the document glass 1 Open the document cover 2 Place the document face down on the document glass and align it with the registration guide on the top left corner of the glass 3 Close the document cover K NOTE Leaving the document cover open while copying may affect the
69. desired menu item is highlighted and then press the Y Set button K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Standard Suitable for documents with normal sized characters Fine Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot matrix printer Super Fine Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail The super fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine also supports the super fine resolution Ultra Fine Suitable for documents containing photographic images K NOTE Faxes scanned in the Super Fine mode transmit at the highest resolution supported by the receiving device Original Type To select the default original type for the current fax job 1 Press the lt gt Fax button 2 Specify a fax number For details see Sending a Fax Automatically on page 226 and Automatic Dialing on page 235 Press the W button until Preferences is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 4 Press the V button until Original Type is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Faxing 227 5 Press the V button to select the desired setting and then press the Y Set button K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Text Suitable for documents with text Photo Suitable for documents with photos Lighter Darker To adjust the contrast to make the fax lighter or darker than the original 1 Press t
70. disabled For details see Function Enabled on page 158 K NOTE A password is required to enter Admin Menu when Panel Lock Set is setto Enable In this case enter the password you specified and press the y Set button NOTE Ensure that the telephone line is connected properly For details see Connecting the Telephone Line on page 35 Configuring Fax Initial Settings K NOTE The following settings can be configured also using Advance Tools on Easy Setup Navigator Setting Your Country You need to set the country where your printer is used for using the fax service on the printer Press the E Menu button Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Fax Settings is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Country is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button to select the country where the printer is used and then press the Y Set button u O 30d FP Ww NB Ensure that Are You Sure is displayed press the W button to select Yes and then press the Y Set button The printer restarts automatically to apply the settings K NOTE In case of either one when you configure the country setting the information which is registered to the device is initialized Setting the Printer ID In most countries
71. every fax transmission Print On Error Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission to multiple destinations Protocol Monitor Purpose To set whether to print a protocol monitor report which helps you identify the cause of a communication problem Values Print Always Prints a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission Print On Error Prints a protocol monitor report only when an error occurs Print Disable Does not print a protocol monitor report after a fax transmission Country Purpose To select the country where the printer is used System Settings Use this menu to configure a variety of printer features K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Power Saver Timer Purpose To specify the time for transition to power saver mode Values Sleep 5min Specifies the time taken by the printer before it enters Sleep mode after it finishes a Available Range job 5 30min Deep Sleep 6min Specifies the time taken by the printer before it enters Deep Sleep mode after it goes Available Range into Sleep mode 1 6min Enter 5 in Sleep to put the printer in the power saver timer mode 5 minutes after it finishes a job This uses less energy but requires more warm up time for the printer Enter 5 if your printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting and
72. for the first time follow the on screen instructions on the operator panel to configure the initial settings For details see Configuring Initial Settings on the Operator Panel on page 38 Connecting Your Printer 37 Setting Up Your Printer Configuring Initial Settings on the Operator Panel You need to set the language country time zone date and time when you turn on printer for the first time K NOTE When you turn on the printer for the first time the setup wizard appears on the LCD panel If you do not proceed with the setup within 3 minutes the status of the printer changes to Ready to Copy If you want to run the setup wizard again select Power On Wizard from the LCD panel K NOTE For more information on operator panel see Understanding the Printer Menus on page 117 1 Ensure that Please Select Language appears and then select the language you want to use on the operator panel from the drop down list and then press the Y Set button 2 Press the Y Set button to start setting the country Ensure that Please Select Country appears Select your country from the drop down list and then press the Y Set button 4 Ensure that Please Select Time Zone appears Select the appropriate time zone from the following drop down list and then press the Y Set button Geographic Region Time Zone Africa UTC Accra Bamako Dakar Nouakchott UTC Casablanca pa TC 01 00 Algiers Douala Librevil
73. functions by password and allow the user to change it K NOTE This menu sets a password to limit the Copy Scan Fax and USB Print services When you change the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool click Set Password you change on the left frame and set the password Values Copy Service Lock Set Allows you to set a password for the Copy Service feature Scan Service Lock Set Allows you to set a password for the Scan Service feature Fax Service Lock Set Allows you to set a password for the Fax Service feature Print from USB Allows you to set a password for the USB Print Service feature New Password Sets a password required to use the Copy Scan Fax and USB Print services Re enter Password Enter the new password again to confirm Secure Receive Purpose To set a password to secure the incoming faxes When this feature is enabled the printer stores incoming faxes and prints them when the correct password is entered on the operator panel K NOTE This menu sets a password to lock printing incoming fax When changing the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool click Set Password on the left frame and set the password Values Secure Receive Set Allows you to set a password to secure the incoming faxes New Password Sets a password that is required to print incoming faxes Re enter Password Enter the new password again to confirm Copy Defaults Purpose To c
74. in the redial settings To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts see Available Fax Settings Options on page 224 K NOTE The printer will not automatically redial a number that was busy when the number was manually entered 228 Faxing Sending a Delayed Fax You can save scanned documents for transmission at a specified time in order to take advantage of lower long distance rates 1 u O Ol A Load the document s face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document s in first OR Place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 or Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 Press the lt Fax button Enter the fax number of the remote fax machine using the numeric keypad and then press the Y Set button You can also use speed dial or group dial numbers to specify the fax number For more information see Automatic Dialing on page 235 Press the V button until Preferences is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Delayed Start is highlighted and then press the vA Set button Press the V button until On is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Use the numeric keypad or press the V or A button to specify the start time and then press the Y Set button Configure the fax settings as necessary Setti
75. is selected for a color mode Grayscale Scans in grayscale when Black amp White is selected for a color mode Color Button Color Scans in color when Color is selected for a color mode Color Photo Scans in color Photo when Color is selected for a color mode This is suitable for photographic images Resolution Purpose To specify the default scan resolution Understanding the Printer Menus 121 Values 200 x 200 dpi 300 x 300 dpi 400 x 400 dpi 600 x 600 dpi Document Size Purpose To specify the default document size Values A4 210 x 297 mm A5 148 x 210 mm B5 182 x 257 mm Letter 8 5 x 11 Folio 8 5 x 13 Legal 8 5 x 14 Executive 7 25 x 10 5 1 The default varies depending on country specific factory default Lighter Darker Purpose To set the default scan density level Values Lighter2 Makes the scanned image lighter than the original Works well with dark print Lighterl Normal Works well with standard typed or printed documents Darkerl Makes the scanned image darker than the original Works well with light print or faint pencil markings Darker2 Sharpness Purpose To set the default sharpness level Values Sharpest Makes the scanned image sharper than the original Sharper Normal Does not make the scanned image sharper or softer than the original Softer Makes the sca
76. jams or poor print quality Always use new dry and undamaged paper Before loading the paper identify the recommended print side of the paper This information is usually indicated on the paper package Do not use paper that you have cut or trimmed yourself Do not mix print media sizes weights or types in the same source This may result in a paper jam Do not remove the standard 150 sheet tray while a job is printing Ensure that the paper is properly loaded in the standard 150 sheet tray Flex paper back and forth and then fan them Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface Selecting Preprinted Media and Letterhead When selecting preprinted media and letterhead paper for the printer Use grain long paper for best results Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process Select paper that absorb ink but do not bleed Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces Use paper printed with heat resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copying machines The ink must withstand temperatures of 225 C 437 F without melting or releasing hazardous emissions Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner or the silicone in the fusing unit Inks that are oxidation set or oil based should meet these requirements latex inks might not If you are in doubt contact your paper supplier Printing on Letterhead Check with the manufacturer or vendor to det
77. job Margin Top Bottom Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0 mm to 50 mm 0 0 to 2 0 inch Margin Left Right Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range of 0 mm to 50 mm 0 0 to 2 0 inch Margin Middle Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm to 50 mm 0 0 to 2 0 inch Scan Defaults Purpose To create your own default scan settings Values File Format Sets the file format to save the scanned image Color Sets whether to scan in color or in black and white Resolution Sets the default scan resolution Document Size Sets the default document size Lighter Darker Sets the default scan density level Sharpness Sets the default sharpness level Auto Exposure Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the scanned image Margin Top Bottom Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0 mm to 50 mm 0 0 to 2 0 inch Margin Left Right Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range of 0 mm to 50 mm 0 0 to 2 0 inch Margin Middle Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm to 50 mm 0 0 to 2 0 inch TIFF File Format Sets the TIFF file format to TIFF V6 or TTN2 Image Compression Sets the image compression level Max E mail Size Sets the maximum size of e mail that can be sent within the range of 50 K bytes to 16384 K bytes The def
78. left side of the page K NOTE The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the desired printer name listed in Printer Name The Tool Box opens Click the System Settings tab Select Printer Information and Settings from the list at the left side of the page and click Reports button on the page The Reports page is displayed 6 Click the button for the desired report or list The report or list is printed Admin Menu Use this menu to configure a variety of printer features Z NOTE A password is required to enter Admin Menu when Panel Lock Set is setto Enable In this case enter the password you specified and press the V Set button K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Phone Book Use this menu to configure the speed dial and group dial settings Speed Dial Purpose To store up to 99 frequently called numbers in speed dial locations See also Setting Speed Dial on page 235 Understanding the Printer Menus 129 Group Dial Purpose To create a group of fax destinations and register it under a two digit dial code Up to 6 group dial codes can be registered See also Setting Group Dial on page 237 PCL Settings Use this menu to configure the PCL print settings Paper Size Purpose To specify the default paper size Values mm series A4 210 x 297mm
79. memory to the RAM disk file system Secure Print job will be aborted and recorded to the job log 40 MB Sets the allocation of memory to the RAM disk file system 80 MB Fax Server Address Book Purpose To specify whether to search the phone numbers from the LDAP server Values Off Does not search the phone numbers from the LDAP server On Searches the phone numbers from the LDAP server E mail Server Address Book Purpose To specify whether to search the e mail addresses from the LDAP server Values Off Does not search the e mail addresses from the LDAP server On Searches the e mail addresses from the LDAP server Power On Wizard Purpose To perform initial setup for the printer Values Yes Performs the initial setup for the printer No Does not perform the initial setup for the printer Maintenance Use this menu to initialize NVM non volatile memory configure the plain paper quality adjustment settings and configure the security settings K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings F W Version Purpose To display the version of the controller Understanding the Printer Menus 153 Service Tag Purpose To display the service tag of the printer Express Code Purpose To display the express service code of the printer Paper Density Purpose To specify the paper density Values Plain Light Normal
80. name text box and then click Next To use this printer as the default printer select the Set as the default printer check box Installation starts As the driver installation is completed click Print a test page to verify installation Click Finish For Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition K NOTE You must log in as an administrator 1 0 Aa Ww N Extract the following zip file to your desired location D Driver XPS Win_7Vista XPS V3_E525w zip where D is the drive letter of the optical drive Click Start gt Control Panel Hardware and Sound gt Printers Click Add a printer Click Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer Select your printer or click The printer that I want isn t listed When you select your printer go to step 8 When you click The printer that I want isn t listed go to step 6 Select Add a printer using a TCP IP address or hostname and then click Next Select TCP IP Device from Device type and enter the IP address for Hostname or IP address and then click Next Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows 53 10 12 13 14 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box Click Browse then select the extracted folder in step 1 and then click OK Select your printer name and click Next To change the printer name enter the printer name in the Printer name text box and then click Next To use this printer as the default printer
81. o o eee 11 Page Display Format o o ee 18 Top Frame s e eie a e a eo ee Pe 78 Lettkrame 2 La ca AG eet Sa hea Me re at be ee AA E 19 RIGHtErame ao lo a Be il i a AS ee dee 80 Changing the Settings of the Menu Items 81 Details ofthe Menu Items o o o ee e 81 Printer Status a o tad 83 Printer JobS 3 tuo a ct a a a Lb lad 84 Printer settings 2 st a ls a to hs dla rd 85 Print Server Settings o o e ee 9 Print Volume issu en 8 p28 4 ld 111 Address Booksi e 54 vue OX fate te vee Glee ha Sees 111 Tray settings Bee Ae wk Re en BS Bis Hee h 116 Contents 14 Understanding the Printer Menus 117 Defaults Settings o o 117 Copy Defaults s sys di ti ak 117 Scan Defaults ii ori ad 121 FGD e raul dub DA e e a A 124 Print from USB Defaults 2 2 0 o e e 126 Wray Settings eee occ ee anges A Be a ar da 126 MIR Reais ten a AAS Pde tend a te A 127 Report List oir csi a a Dn Eee 128 System Settings 20 cia id cd EE 128 Panel Sendo ra a ed SM a E 128 PEL Fonts List fons sha ta ati ri a 128 PS Fonts List cion acdc new a a eee ed 128 JODHIStOrY 4d ai eee ele hae 128 EGRORISLORY s sects oct tent foe Ls he ald ae o a ds Soe at Tan act Wf ta L 128 Color TestP ge cni pp ee A we BO a 128 Protocol Monitor 0 00000 eee eee 128 Address Book ovni cir Fae Re ba ee BRE ee EAS 1
82. on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 or Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 2 Press the B Copy button 3 Press the V button until Preferences is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 4 Press the V button until Multiple Up is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 5 Press the V button to select the desired setting and then press the Y Set button K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Off Does not perform multiple up printing Auto Automatically reduces the size of original images to fit onto one sheet of paper Manual Prints the original size of original images onto the one sheet of paper in the size specified in Reduce Enlarge 6 Customize the copy settings including the number of copies copy size contrast and image quality For more information see Setting Copy Options on page 191 7 Ensure that Start Copy is highlighted and then press the gt Start button to start copying When you are using the document glass and Mult iple Up is set to Auto or Manual the display prompts you for another page Press the W button to select Yes or No and then press the Y Set button If you select Yes press the W button to select Continue or Cancel and then press the Y Set button Margin Top Bottom To specify the top and bottom margins of the copy 1 Load the docum
83. operator panel when the printing of even pages is complete Remove the printed paper from the center output tray 2 Load the printed paper with the blank side facing up into the standard 150 sheet tray The document is printed in the order of page 1 page 3 and then page 5 K NOTE Warped or curled printed paper may cause paper jams Straighten them before loading them K NOTE Manual duplex printing is not enabled if document consists of various sizes of paper 174 Loading Print Media Using the Output Tray Extension The output tray extension is designed to prevent print media from falling from the printer after the print job is complete Before printing a document ensure that the output tray extension is fully extended Z NOTE When you pull out envelopes or small size print media lift up the scanner unit a Loading Print Media 175 Printing Copying Scanning and Faxing A 177 18 GO DYING ii ea 189 CAN SS 200 ZO AX Ga caries onan mane 221 176 Printing This chapter covers tips for printing how to print certain lists of information from your printer and how to cancel a job Tips for Successful Printing Tips on Storing Print Media Store your print media properly For more information see Storing Print Media on page 166 Avoiding Paper Jams K NOTE It is recommended that you try a limited sample of any print media you are considering using with the printer before purchasing l
84. printer K NOTE If the Software and Documentation disc does not automatically launch try the following steps For Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 R2 1 Click Start gt All Programs for Windows Vista and Windows 7 gt Accessories for Windows Vista and Windows 7 gt Run 2 Enter D setup exe where D is the drive letter of the optical drive and then click OK For Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Windows Server 2012 and Windows Server 2012 R2 1 Point to the bottom right corner of the screen and then click Search gt Enter Run in the search box click Apps and then click Run 2 Enter D setup exe where D is the drive letter of the optical drive and then click OK 42 Setting Up Your Printer Setting the IP Address Assigning an IP Address An IP address is a unique number that consists of four sections that are delimited by a period and can include up to three digits in each section for example 192 0 2 1 You can select the IP mode from Dual Stack and IPv4 Mode If your network supports both the IPv4 and IPv6 mode select Dual Stack NM CAUTION Assigning an IP address that is already in use can cause network performance issues K NOTE Assigning an IP address is considered as an advanced function and is normally done by a system administrator K NOTE When you assign an IP address manually in the IPv6 mode use the Dell Printer C
85. reduces a fax page to fit it onto the output paper Understanding the Printer Menus 147 ECM Purpose To set whether to enable the Error Correction Mode ECM To use the ECM the remote machines must also support the ECM Values Off Disable the ECM On Enables the ECM Modem Speed Purpose To specify the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs Values 2 4 Kbps 4 8 Kbps 9 6 Kbps 14 4 Kbps 33 6 Kbps Fax Activity Purpose To set whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications Values Auto Print Automatically prints a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications No Auto Print Does not automatically print a fax activity report Fax Transmit Purpose To set whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs Values Print Always Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission Print On Error Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission Fax Broadcast Purpose To set whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations or only when an error occurs 148 Understanding the Printer Menus Values Print Always Prints a transmission report after
86. ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company After the telephone company has provided a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring pattern Auto Receive Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call Auto Receive Tel Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call Auto Receive Answer Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming call Line Monitor Sets the volume of the line monitor which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made Ring Tone Volume Sets the volume of the ring tone which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone Fax Line Type Sets the line type Tone Pulse Sets the dialing type Resend Delay Specifies the interval between transmission attempts Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 91 Redial Attempts Specifies the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax number is busy If you enter 0 the printer will not redial Redial Delay Specifies the interval between redial attempts Junk Fax Setup Sets whether to reject faxes sent from un
87. the following operating systems that includes folder sharing For Mac OS X a shared user account is required on the Mac OS X 204 Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2012 R2 Mac OS X 10 6 OS X 10 7 OS X 10 8 OS X 10 9 OS X 10 10 Scanning e Using FTP To transfer data via FTP one of the following FTP servers and an account to the FTP server login name and password are required e Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 R2 FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 6 0 e Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012 FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 8 0 e Mac OSX FTP service of Mac OS X 10 6 OS X 10 7 OS X 10 8 OS X 10 9 and OS X 10 10 For information on how to configure the FTP service contact your system administrator Follow the procedure below to use the Scan to Network Folder feature Confirming a Login Name and Password on page 206 Creating a Folder to Store the Document on page 207 Registering Destinations in the Address Book on page 209 Sending the Scanned File to a Computer or Server on page 215 Scanning 205 Confirming a Login Name and Password When Using SMB The Scan to Network Folder feature requires a user login account
88. then click Print Test Page in Printer properties of the printer driver Is the problem recovered Go to action 5 Disable the Toner Saving Mode in the printer driver The task is complete a On the Graphics tab in Printing Preferences of the printer driver ensure that the Toner Saving Mode check box is not selected Is the problem recovered Contact Dell Troubleshooting 291 Toner Smears or Print Comes Off Stain on Back Side ABC DEF Action Yes No 1 The print media surface may be uneven Try changing the Paper Type The task is complete Go to action 2 setting in the printer driver For example change the plain paper to thick a On the General or Paper Output tab in Printing Preferences of the printer driver change the Paper Type setting Is the problem recovered 2 Verify that the correct print media is being used See Supported Paper The task is complete Go to action 3 Types on page 167 If not use the print media recommended for the printer Is the problem recovered 3 Adjust the fusing unit temperature The task is complete Contact Dell a Launch the Tool Box and click Adjust Fusing Unit on the Printer Maintenance tab b Adjust the fixing temperature by turning up the value for your printing media c Click Apply New Settings Is the problem recovered 292 Troubleshooting Random Spots Blurred Images ABC DEF 0 Action Yes No 1 Ensure th
89. to the destination as an e mail attachment Forward to Forwards incoming faxes to the server specified in from Server Type through Server Subdirectory Path optional below without printing The faxes are converted to a PDF file and stored in the destination Fwd to Server Prints and forwards incoming faxes to the server specified in from Server Type and Print through Subdirectory Path optional below The faxes are converted to a PDF file and stored in the destination Fax Forward Number Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded Forwarding E mail Address Specifies the e mail address of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded Server Type Specifies the type of destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded To forward to an FTP server or a shared folder on a networked computer select Server FTP or Computer SMB respectively and then specify the settings from Host Address IP Address or DNS Name through Subdirectory Path optional below Host Address IP Address or DNS Name Enter the host name or IP address of an FTP server or a computer Port Number Enter the port number Login Name if required by host Enter the user account name that has access to the shared folder on your computer or FTP server Login Password Enter the password corresponding to the above login name Re enter Password Re enter you
90. trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products Dell Inc disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS This software and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 and in applicable FAR provisions Dell Inc One Dell Way Round Rock Texas 78682 USA May 2015 Rev A00 Notes Cautions and Warnings 17 Dell Color Multifunction Printer E525w User s Guide Click the links to the left for information on the features and operation of your Dell Color Multifunction Printer E525w For information on other documentation included with your Dell Color Multifunction Printer E525w see Finding Information on page 19 NOTE In this manual Dell Color Multifunction Printer E525w is referred to as the printer Conventions The following describe the meaning of the symbols and fonts used in this manual Bold texts Names of hardware button on the operator panel e Screen names on the LCD panel e Menus commands windows or dialog boxes displayed on the computer screen Texts in Courier New font Menus and messages displayed on the LCD panel e Characte
91. varies depending on country specific factory default Original Type To select the copy image quality 1 oa FF Ww N 194 Load the document s face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document s in first OR Place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 or Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 Press the GB Copy button Press the W button until Preferences is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Original Type is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button to select the desired settings and then press the Y Set button NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Text Suitable for documents with text Text amp Photo Used for documents with both text and photos Photo Suitable for documents with photos Copying Lighter Darker To adjust the contrast to make the copy lighter or darker than the original 1 0 Aa Ww N Load the document s face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document s in first OR Place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 or Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 Press the GB Copy button
92. 1 1 Compliance Testing 6 amp 7 Functional Tests This equipment is not capable under all operating conditions of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances 4 5 1 Off hook Line Impedance 4 This equipment does not fully meet Telecom s impedance requirements Performance limitations may occur quip y P q y when used in conjunction with some parts of the network Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances 4 9 3 Non voice Equipment 4 This equipment is not capable under all operating conditions of correct at the higher speeds for which it is designed Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances 5 6 1 General Requirements Automatic Dialling Devices 3 This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111 Emergency Service 5 5 5 User Instructions 4 If a charge for local calls is unacceptable the Dial button should NOT be used for local calls Only the 7 digits of the local number should be dialled from your telephone DO NOT dial the area code digit or the 0 prefix 8 1 7 User Instructions Automatic Call Set up b This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111 Emergency Service 8 2 1 b Call Answering When this equipment is set up call answering not
93. 2 0 works on access points with the following encryption types Mixed Mode PSK WPA PSK AES WPA2 PSK AES Open No Security You can select a method to configure a wireless setting from the following WPS PBC Wi Fi WPS Button WPS PBC Operator Panel Menu WPS PIN 2 Auto SSID Setup Manual SSID Setup 1 WPS PBC Wi Fi Protected Setup Push Button Configuration is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration by starting WPS PBC on the printer with the Wi Fi WPS button or operator panel menu and then pressing the button provided on the wireless LAN access point Registrar or router This setting is available only when the access point supports WPS PBC WPS PIN Wi Fi Protected Setup Personal Identification Number is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wire less configuration by entering PIN assignments in the printer and computer This setting performed through access point is available only when the access points of your wireless router supports WPS 22 K NOTE Connecting to the network via Ethernet cable disables wireless setting 30 Connecting Your Printer WPS PBC Wi Fi WPS Button You can start WPS PBC Wi Fi Protected Setup Push Button Configuration by pressing the Wi Fi WPS button Y NOTE WPS PBC is available only when the wireless LAN access point Registrar or router supports WPS PBC NOTE Before startin
94. 2 Makes the copy lighter than the original Works well with dark print Lighterl Normal Works well with standard typed or printed documents Darkerl Makes the copy darker than the original Works well with light print or faint pencil markings Darker2 Sharpness Purpose To set the default sharpness level Values Sharpest Makes the copy sharper than the original Sharper Normal Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original Softer Makes the copy softer than the original Softest Auto Exposure Purpose To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy Values Off Does not suppress the background On Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the copy Understanding the Printer Menus 119 Color Balance R Purpose To specify the default color balance level of red within the range of 2 to 2 Color Balance G Purpose To specify the default color balance level of green within the range of 2 to 2 Color Balance B Purpose To specify the default color balance level of blue within the range of 2 to 2 Gray Balance Purpose To specify the default gray balance level within the range of 2 to 2 Multiple Up Purpose To print two original images to fit onto one sheet of paper Values Off Does not perform multiple up printing Auto Automatically reduces the size of original images to fi
95. 28 ENCACUVI ti gies abet Syd ae et Rt 128 Stored Documents List 0 o e 129 Printing a Report List Using the Operator Panel 129 Printing a Report List Using the Tool BOX 129 O A O ag a Ae got ape 129 Phone Booki a t 04 oi ad be ey eee 129 PCL Settings 00 ra rara at Ow Ak Goh a AS Martie OR eH aes 130 PS SettingS 24 4 5 284 vac GM Re May ee Bee Ree 135 PDF S ttingS tica Bo iw te Sed a is 136 NetWork els ae Beart Boe Ae ee eh ed 137 Fax S ttings lt i 290 A A A AY 142 System SOMOS ii SA a Se ad Bie E a 149 Maintenance 2 ea ee Ry A as 153 Secur e SettingS s 208 4 go ee Bla dates aha he awh ce 157 Scan to E M lly0 eee Sey oe ab He a eee oe eee 159 USB Settings sa ir Gad eee s ra ed Set 159 Panel Language eee ee ee eee 160 Panel Lock Function 2 02002 eee eee eee 160 Enabling the PanelLock 0 000000 pees 160 Disabling the Panel Lock 0 o o o 020000000000 161 Resetting Defaults ee 161 Contents 7 Paper ias na A a Peed thee lo E a 162 Recommended Paper 00 0002 eee eee 162 Unacceptable Paper 0200000 eee eee eae 162 Selecting Paper piese cotilla a aad 163 Selecting Preprinted Media and Letterhead 163 Printing on Letterhead o o o e e 163 Loading Letterhead o o o 164 Selecting Pre punched Paper
96. 3 Covers Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for cover paper within the range of 3 to 3 Label Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for labels within the range of 3 to 3 Coated Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for coated paper within the range of 3 to 3 Recycled Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for recycled paper within the range of 3 to 3 Envelope Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for envelopes within the range of 3 to 3 Adjust Fusing Unit Purpose To specify the optimum temperature settings for printing for the fusing unit To decrease the temperature set negative values To increase the temperature set positive values The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types When the printed paper has curled try to decrease the temperature When the toner does not fuse on the paper properly try to increase the temperature K NOTE The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item Values Plain Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for plain paper within the range of 3 to 3 Plain Thick Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for thick plain paper within the range of 3 to 3 Covers Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for cover paper within the range of 3 to 3 Label Sets the temperature settings for the fusing uni
97. 31 only alphanumeric characters The original setting will remain valid if no input is made Characters entered for community name in the previous settings will not be displayed on the screen The default Read Community is public Re enter Community Name Enters the community name to access read only data again to Read only confirm it Community Name Sets the community name to access read and write data using up Read Write to 31 alphanumeric characters The original setting will remain valid if no input is made Characters entered for community name in the previous settings will not be displayed on the screen The default Read Write Community is private Re enter Community Name Enters the community name to access read and write data again Read Write to confirm it 102 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Community Name Trap Sets the community name used for trap up to 31 alphanumeric characters The original setting will remain valid if no input is made Characters entered for Community Name Trap in the previous settings will not be displayed on the screen The default Trap Community is NULL Re enter Community Name Enters the community name used for trap again to confirm it Trap Trap Notification 1 4 Trap Address Type Select the check boxes to notify trap occurrence In this case Trap Address specify the IP address and IP socket in the following format Trap Notification
98. 6 034 707 Press the Set button to clear the message If the error continues to appear after the redial for the 034 708 specified number of times try the following e Check if the phone line is connected properly See Connecting the Telephone Line on page 35 e Check if the destination number is available e Set Number of Redial to the larger value e Set Resend DelayorRedial Delay longer e LowerModem Speed 034 709 Press the Set button to clear the message If the error continues to appear after the redial for the 034 710 specified number of times try the following e Set Number of Redial to the larger value e Set Resend Delay orRedial Delay longer 034 711 Press the Set button to clear the message If the error continues to appear after the redial for the 034 712 specified number of times try the following 034 713 e Set Number of Redial to the larger value e Set Resend Delay orRedial Delay longer e LowerModem Speed 034 714 Press the Set button to clear the message If the error continues to appear after the redial for the specified number of times try the following e Check if the destination number is available e Set Number of Redial to the larger value e Set Resend Delay orRedial Delay longer Understanding Printer Messages 251 Status code What you can do 034 715 Press the Set button to clear the message If the error continues to appear after the redial for the specified number of times try the f
99. 8 016 339 016 344 016 347 016 354 016 355 016 370 016 372 016 374 016 375 016 376 016 393 016 395 016 503 Press the V Set button Check if the SMTP server and the DNS server are set correctly 016 504 Press the VA Set button Check if the user name and password for the POP3 server are set correctly button Check if the SMTP server address and e mail destination are set correctly 016 506 Press the vA Set 016 507 Press the Y Set button Check if the user name and password used for the SMTP server are set correctly 248 Understanding Printer Messages Status code What you can do 016 700 Press the Y Set button to cancel the current print job 016 701 016 720 016 744 Press the Y Set button Contact Dell if this message appears repeatedly See Contacting Dell on 016 745 page 310 016 749 Press the Y Set button to cancel the current print job 016 753 PDL emulation error has occurred Press the Y Set button to clear the message and cancel the current print job Check if the password is correct 016 755 016 764 Press the Y Set button Contact SMTP server administrator 016 766 016 767 Press the Y Set button Check if the e mail address is correct and try scanning again 016 791 Insert the USB memory and press the Y Set button to clear the message 016 795 Press the Y Set button to clear the message Che
100. Antarctica TC 04 00 Palmer Archipelago Santiago TC 05 00 Havana TC 03 00 Rothera TC 03 00 Syowa TC 06 00 Mawson Vostok TC 07 00 Davis TC 08 00 Casey TC 10 00 Dumont d Urville TC 12 00 McMurdo Setting Up Your Printer 39 Geographic Region Time Zone Asia TC 02 00 Amman TC 02 00 Beirut TC 02 00 Damascus TC 02 00 Jerusalem TC 02 00 Nicosia TC 02 00 Palestine TC 03 00 Aden Baghdad Qatar Riyadh TC 03 30 Tehran TC 04 Baku TC 04 00 Dubai Muscat Tbilisi TC 04 00 Yerevan TC 04 30 Kabul TC 05 00 Agtau Aqtobe Ashgabat Samarkand TC 05 00 Ekaterinburg TC 05 00 Karachi TC 05 30 Colombo Kolkata TC 05 45 Kathmandu TC 06 00 Almaty Bishkek Dhaka Thimphu TC 06 00 Novosibirsk Omsk TC 06 30 Yangon Rangoon TC 07 00 Bangkok Ho Chi Minh Hovd Jakarta TC 07 00 Krasnoyarsk TC 08 00 Beijing Chongqing Hong Kong Shanghai TC 08 00 Irkutsk TC 08 00 Kuala Lumpur Makassar Manila Singapore TC 08 00 Taipei TC 08 00 Ulaan Baatar TC 09 00 Dili Jayapura TC 09 00 Pyongyang TC 09 00 Seoul
101. Dell Color Multifunction Printer E525w User s Guide Regulatory Model Dell E525w Contents Before Beginning 0 00 cece eee eee 16 A Notes Cautions and Warnings 00000 17 1 Dell Color Multifunction Printer E525w User s Guide AA e al 18 Conventions 2 26 8 ee a e a e A o 18 2 Finding Information 0 000005 19 3 Product Features is oboe eek aie eee had ee eal pwede 20 4 About the Printer soc ood a ds 22 Front View obs ye Oe ee es toe be a ba ee eed 22 Rear VieW is dga ia a ed ed be rt 23 Space Requirements o 24 Automatic Document Feeder ADF 25 OperatorPanel o o o 25 Securing the Printer o ee 26 Ordering Supplies o o o o 26 Printer Setup nar As 27 5 Connecting Your Printer aoaaa aoaaa aaa 28 Connecting Printer to Computer or Network 29 USB ection aes o a a A 29 Ethernet Comnecti0N o o e e 29 Contents 3 Wireless Connection 30 Reconfiguring the Wireless Setting 34 Connecting the Telephone Line o 35 Turning on the Printer 36 6 Setting Up Your Printer 0 38 Configuring Initial Settings on the Operator Panel 38 Printer Setup Using the Software a
102. Density CTD Sensor on page 268 b Launch the Tool Box and click Registration Adjustment on the Printer Maintenance tab c Clear the On check box for Auto Registration Adjustment d Click Start next to Auto Correct Is the problem recovered Go to action 3 3 Print the color registration chart and manually correct the color The task is complete registration a Click Registration Adjustment on the Printer Maintenance tab b Clear the On check box for Auto Registration Adjustment c Click Start next to Print Color Regi Chart The color registration chart is printed d Select the value with the straight line See Adjusting Color Registration on page 269 for details e Click Apply New Settings f Click Start next to Print Color Regi Chart to print the color registration chart again g Adjust the values for every color until the lines at 0 are the straightest Is the problem recovered Contact Dell Troubleshooting 299 Protrudent Bumpy Paper ABC DEF Action Yes No 1 Clean up the fusing unit a Load one sheet of paper in the standard 150 sheet tray and then print a solid image all over paper b Load the printed sheet with the side to be printed on facing down and then print a blank sheet of paper Is the problem recovered The task is complete Contact Dell Jam Misfeed Jam Action Yes No 1 Ensure that paper is properly loaded in the standard 150
103. Displays the total number of sheets used by the print job Host 1 F Displays the status of the host interface Job Submitted Time Displays the date when the job was submitted 84 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Printer Settings Use this menu to display the Printer Settings Report and to configure the printer settings The following tabbed pages are displayed at the top of the right frame Printer Settings Report This tab contains the Menu Settings and Reports pages Menu Settings Displays the current settings of the printer menus Reports Purpose To print the settings and history information of your printer Values System Settings Click Start to print the system settings page Panel Settings Click Start to print the panel settings page PCL Fonts List Click Start to print the PCL fonts list PS Fonts List Click Start to print the PS fonts list Job History Click Start to print the job history report Error History Click Start to print the error history report Protocol Monitor Click Start to print the protocol monitor report Address Book Click Start to print the address book report Color Test Page Click Start to print the color test page Fax Activity Click Start to print the fax activity report Stored Documents Click Start to print the stored documents list Printer Settings This tab contains the System Settings USB Settings PCL Settings P
104. EP 128 Bit Hex to use through the wireless network 4 WPA2 PSK AES Nn pecifies the WPA2 PSK AES to use through the wireless network 4 Mixed Mode PSK Nn pecifies the Mixed Mode PSK to use through the wireless network WEP Key 1 Enter the WEP key when WEP is selected from Encryption Re enter WEP Key 1 Enter the WEP key 1 again to confirm WEP Key 2 Enter the WEP key when WEP is selected from Encryption Re enter WEP Key 2 Enter the WEP key 2 again to confirm WEP Key 3 Enter the WEP key when WEP is selected from Encryption Re enter WEP Key 3 Enter the WEP key 3 again to confirm WEP Key 4 Enter the WEP key when WEP is selected from Encryption Re enter WEP Key 4 Enter the WEP key 4 again to confirm Transmit Key Specifies the transmit key type from the list Pass Phrase Specifies the passphrase Re enter Pass Phrase Enter the passphrase again to confirm 1 This item is available only when Infrastructure is selected for Network Type Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 99 Wi Fi Direct Purpose To configure the detailed setting of the Wi Fi Direct connection Values Wi Fi Direct Wi Fi Direct Sets whether to enable the Wi Fi Direct connection Group Role Sets the group role of the printer Device Name Specifies the printer name that identifies the Wi Fi Direct network with up to 32 alphanumeric charac
105. IP Port IPv4 Number Specify the IP address and IP socket in the Notify nnn nnn nnn nnn mmmmm format Each section of nnn is a variable value between 0 and 255 Note that values 127 and 224 254 are not valid for the first three digits only IP socket mmmmm is a variable value between 0 and 65535 IPv6 Specify the IP address and IP socket in the XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX mmmmm format Each section of xxxx is a hexadecimal variable value between 0 and ffff IP socket mmmmm is a variable value between 0 and 65535 Authenticate Error Trap Select the check box to notify authentication error trapping SNMP v3 Purpose To edit the detailed settings of SNMP v3 protocol To enter this page click Edit SNMP v3 Properties in the SNMP page Values Administrator Account Account Enabled Select the check box to enable the administrator account User Name Enters the user name of the administrator account Authentication Password Sets the authentication password of the administrator account 8 32 Bytes using 8 to 32 alphanumeric characters Confirm Authentication Confirms the set password Password 8 32 Bytes Privacy Password Sets the privacy password of the administrator account using 8 to 8 32 Bytes 32 alphanumeric characters Print Drivers Remote Account Enabled Select the check box to enable the print drivers and remote client Client Account account Reset to default Password C
106. In this case all the destinations registered in the dial numbers between 01 and 09 are displayed To select destinations directly by pressing the One Touch Dial buttons a Press the One Touch Dial button 01 to 04 b Ensure that the desired destination is displayed and then press the Y Set button To select destinations from Phone Book a Press the V button until Phone Book is highlighted and then press the Y Set button OR Press the EC Phone Book button b Press the V button to move the cursor to the desired destination To check the detailed information of the destination press the button c Press the Y Set button to select the destination and then press the gt button You can also directly find the destination by its speed dial number Enter the number using the numeric keypad and then press the Y Set button To search destinations from Phone Book a Press the V button until Search Phone Book is highlighted and then press the Y Set button b Use the numeric keypad to enter the first character of the personal names whose destinations you want to specify and then press the Y Set button Destinations with names beginning with the specified character are displayed c Press the V button to move the cursor to the desired destination To check the detailed information of the destination press the button d Press the Y Set button to select the destination and then press the gt button To search destinatio
107. K NOTE While you set copy options pressing the X Cancel button cancels the changed settings and returns to the default status To create your own default settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press the El Menu button Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Defaults Settings is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Copy Defaults is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the W button until the desired menu item is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the gt or V button until the desired setting is highlighted or enter the value using the numeric keypad and then press the Y Set button Repeat steps 5 and 6 as needed To return to the previous screen press the 5 Back button Copying 199 Scanning Scanning Overview Z NOTE If the Function Enabled setting for SCAN is setto On Password you need to enter the four digit password to use the scan function If the Function Enabled setting for SCAN is set to Of the scan function is disabled For details see Function Enabled on page 158 You can use your Dell Color Multifunction Printer E525w to turn pictures and text into editable images on your computer The resolution setting to use when you scan an item depends on the item type and how you plan to use the image or document after you scan it in to your computer For the best results use these reco
108. Line K NOTE Do not connect your printer directly to a Digital Subscriber Line DSL This may damage the printer To use a DSL you will need to use an appropriate DSL filter Contact your service provider for the DSL filter 1 Plug one end of a telephone line cord to the wall jack connector and the other end to an active wall jack Wall jack connector To the wall jack PHONE 2 Remove the blue plug from the phone connector xk Phone connector 3 To connect a telephone and or answering machine to your printer plug the telephone or answering machine line cord into the phone connector To an external telephone or answering machine Phone connector Connecting Your Printer 35 If the phone communication is serial in your country such as Germany Sweden Denmark Austria Belgium Italy France and Switzerland and you are supplied with a yellow terminator insert the yellow terminator into the IONE phone connector K Yellow terminator Phone connector Turning on the Printer A WARNING Do not use extension cords or power strips A WARNING The printer should not be connected to an Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS system 1 Connect the power cable to the power connector on the rear of your printer see Rear View on page 23 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the power source 36 Connecting Your Printer 3 Tum on the printer K NOTE When you turn on the printer
109. MTP Login User Specifies the SMTP login user Up to 63 alphanumeric characters periods hyphens underscores and at symbols can be used SMTP Login Password Specifies the SMTP account password using up to 31 alphanumeric characters Re enter SMTP Login Enter the SMTP account password again to confirm Password POP3 Server Address Specifies the POP3 server address in IP address format of aaa bbb ccc ddd or as a DNS host name using up to 63 characters POP3 Port Number Specifies the POP3 server port number This must be 110 or between 5000 and 65535 POP User Name Specifies the POP3 account user name Up to 63 alphanumeric characters can be used POP User Password Specifies the POP3 account password using up to 31 alphanumeric characters Re enter POP User Password Enter the password again to confirm 104 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Reply Address Designates the reply e mail address for sent e mails SMTP Server Connection Displays the status of the SMTP server connection E mail Alert Settings E mail List 1 Sets acceptable e mail addresses for the e mail alert feature using up to 255 alphanumeric characters Select Alerts for List 1 Supplies Alerts Specifies whether to receive an e mail alert for consumables Paper Handling Alerts Specifies whether to receive an e mail alert for paper handling and or service calls E mail List 2 Sets acceptable e mail addresses for the
110. Memory Base memory 512 MB Specifications 255 Page Description Language PDL Emulation Operating System and Interface PDL Emulations PCL 6 PCL5e PostScript 3 Compatible XML Paper Specification Host Based OSes Windows Vista Windows Vista 64 bit Edition Windows 7 Windows 7 64 bit Edition Windows 8 Windows 8 64 bit Edition Windows 8 1 Windows 8 1 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2012 R2 Mac OS X 10 6 OS X 10 7 OS X 10 8 OS X 10 9 OS X 10 10 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 1 Desktop x86 SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 and Ubuntu 12 04 Interfaces Standard local USB 2 0 Standard network 10Base T 100Base TX Ethernet IEEE 802 1 1b g n Wireless MIB Compatibility A Management Information Base MIB is a database containing information about network devices such as adapters bridges routers or computers This information helps network administrators manage the network analyze performance traffic errors and so on Dell Color Multifunction Printer E525w complies with standard industry MIB specifications allowing the printer to be recognized and managed by various printer and network management software systems Environment Operation Temperature 5 32 C Relative humidity 15 85
111. Pour consulter l entr e correspondant l appareil dans la liste d quipement radio REL Radio Equipment List d Industry Canada rendez vous sur http www ic gc ca app sitt reltel srch nwRdSrch do lang eng Pour des informations suppl mentaires concernant l exposition aux RF au Canada rendez vous sur http www ic gc ca eic site smt gst nsf eng st08792 html Canada IC Statement NOTICE e This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical Specifications This is confirmed by the registration number The abbreviation IC before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment The Ringer Equivalence Number REN for this terminal equipment is 0 0 The REN assigned to each terminal equipment provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed five Appendix 313 Avis 314 Le pr sent mat riel est conforme aux sp cifications techniques d Industrie Canada applicables au mat riel terminal Cette conformit est confirm e par le num ro d enregistrement Le sigle IC plac devant l
112. Properties From the Sharing tab select the Share this printer check box and then enter a name in the Share name text box Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients using this printer Click OK If the files are not present in your computer insert the server operating system CD For Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64 bit Edition 1 2 3 Click Start gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers Right click the printer icon and select Sharing Click Change sharing options The Windows needs your permission to continue dialog box appears Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows 57 4 5 6 1 Click Continue Select the Share this printer check box and then enter a name in the Share name text box Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients using this printer Click OK For Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition 1 2 3 4 5 6 Click Start gt Control Panel Hardware and Sound gt Printers Right click the printer icon and select Sharing Click Change Sharing Options if exists Select the Share this printer check box and then enter a name in the Share name text box Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients using this printer Click OK For Windows 7 Windows 7 64 bit Edition or Windows Server 2008 R2 1 2 3 4 5 6 Cl
113. RFERENCE STATEMENT E AA A A Rak Pa eee wet Beas bok ee 312 Labeling Requirements 0 00000 eee ues 312 RF Exposure Warning 2 0 ee 312 Canada Industry Canada IC Notices 312 Radio Frequency RF Exposure Information 313 Canada avis d Industry Canada IC 313 Informations concernant l exposition aux fr quences radio RF 313 Canada IC Statement o o e 313 Contents 15 Before Beginning Notes Cautions and Warnings esseeri 17 1 Dell Color Multifunction Printer E525w User s Guide 18 2 Finding Information oes taiivatteae cee hasepat ne luitebe tee atte loa hs be 19 3 Product Features id iene indies 20 4 POUL MG MO ia 22 Notes Cautions and Warnings K NOTE A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your printer AN CAUTION A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem AN WARNING A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage personal injury or death Information in this document is subject to change without notice O 2015 Dell Inc All rights reserved Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc is strictly forbidden Trademarks used in this text Del and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc Microsoft Windows Windows Server Windows Vista and Int
114. Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings Back Click this button to return to the top page Address Book Delete Purpose To delete the address book entries registered on the Address Book page The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Delete on the Address Book top page Values ID Fax Speed Dial Displays the selected user ID Name Displays the name of the of the user registered under the selected user ID Phone Number Displays the phone number of the user E mail Address Displays the e mail address of the user Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings Back Click this button to return to the top page 112 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool FAX Group Top Page Purpose To view the fax group entries registered on the FAX Group page Values GroupID Name Displays a fax group ID and the assigned group name IDs without an entry show Not in Use in the Name column Delete Deletes the entry for the selected group ID Confirm Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected group ID Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected group ID FAX Group Confirm Change Create Purpose To view or edit the fax number group entries on the FAX Group page or create a new entry The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm Ch
115. TION Never use envelopes with windows or coated linings These lead to paper jams and can cause damage to the printer 172 Loading Print Media NOTE If envelopes are still not fed correctly add some bending to the flap of the envelopes as shown in the following illustration The amount of the bending shall be 5 mm 0 20 inches or less K NOTE To confirm the correct orientation of each print media such as envelopes see the instruction on the Envelope Paper Setup Navigator on the printer driver Loading Letterhead Load the letterhead in the printer with the print side facing up Ensure that the title on the letterhead enters the printer first Loading Print Media 173 Loading Print Media When Manual Duplex Printing NOTE When printing on curled paper straighten the paper and then load it in the standard 150 sheet tray K NOTE You can specify the settings required for manual duplex printing on the printer driver K NOTE PS printer driver does not support manual duplex printing When you start manual duplex printing the instruction window appears Note that the window cannot be reopened once it is closed Do not close the window until duplex printing is complete 1 Use the printer driver to start printing your documents Even pages of document are printed first For a six page document it is printed in the order of page 6 page 4 and then page 2 Ready Error LED blinks and the message appears on the
116. The Certificate Management page is displayed Deleting a Digital Certificate 1 246 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser For more information see Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool on page 75 Click Print Server Settings Click the Security tab gt SSL TLS Delete a digital certificate to suit your needs To delete both the uploaded certificate and the self signed certificate a Click Delete All Certificates b Click OK c Click Restart Printer To delete just the digital certificate that is currently in use a Click Certificate Management The Certificate Management page is displayed b Click Delete at the upper right corner of the certificate setting you want to delete c Click Delete d Click Restart Printer K NOTE When you delete one of either the uploaded certificate or the self signed certificate the printer automatically switches to use the other certificate Using Digital Certificates Setting the SSL TLS Communication Feature Enabling the SSL TLS Communication Between the Printer and Client Computers Setting the server certificate in the printer enables the encrypted communication for when client computers access the printer to view or change its settings through the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool or to print files through AirPrint 1 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering the IP address of the printer in your web
117. Understanding Printer Messages 249 Status code What you can do 026 720 Press the Y Set button to clear the message 026 721 026 722 026 723 026 750 026 751 026 752 027 446 Change the IP address of the printer to avoid duplication Turn off the printer and turn it on again 027 452 031 521 Press the Y Set button Confirm login able computer with your system administrator 031 526 Press the Y Set button Check if the domain name of the SMB server is correct Check DNS connection or check if the name of the forwarding destination server is registered with DNS 031 529 Press the Y Set button Check if password is correct 031 530 Press the Y Set button Check if the working path setting to the SMB server is correct 031 533 Press the Y Set button Check the following e If the file name you specified is not used by other users e If file or folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists e If the SMB server encounters any write protection or disk problem 031 534 Press the Y Set button Check if the SMB server encounters any write protection or disk problem 031 535 031 536 031 537 Press the Y Set button Check if the storage location has free space 031 555 Press the Y Set button to clear the message Check if the network is properly connected 031 556 Check if the SMB server encounters any write protection or disk problem 031 557 Pres
118. V button until Preferences is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Faxing Configure the fax settings as necessary Settings such as resolution and contrast are available For details about setting items see Setting Fax Options on page 227 Press the W button until On is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Enter the fax number of the remote fax machine using the numeric keypad You can also use speed dial numbers to specify the fax number For more information see Sending a Fax Using Speed Dial on page 235 Press the gt Start button If the document is loaded on the document glass press the W button until Manual Sendis highlighted and then press the Y Set button K NOTE Press the X Cancel button to cancel the fax job while sending the fax Setting Fax Options Set the following options for the current fax job before pressing the gt Start button to send faxes K NOTE The fax options automatically return to their default status after faxing Resolution To specify the resolution level to be used for fax transmission 1 Press the lt gt Fax button 2 Specify a fax number For details see Sending a Fax Automatically on page 226 and Automatic Dialing on page 235 Press the V button until Preferences is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Resolution is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until the
119. WEP Key 1 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 3 and WEP Key 4 K NOTE This item is displayed when the Ethernet cable is disconnected and Wi Fi is setto On WPS Setup Purpose To configure the wireless network using Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS Values Push Button PBC Start No Disables the security method of WPS PBC Configuration Yes Configures the wireless setting with the security method of WPS PBC PIN Code Start Configuration Configures the wireless setting using the PIN code assigned automatically by the printer Print PIN Code Prints the PIN code Confirm it when you enter the PIN code to your computer 1 You can also start WPS PBC by pressing and holding the Wi Fi WPS button K NOTE WPS PBC stands for Wi Fi Protected Setup Push Button Configuration K NOTE WPS 2 0 compliant WPS 2 0 works on access points with the following encryption types Mixed Mode PSK WPA PSK AES WPA2 PSK AES Open No Security K NOTE This item is available only when the Ethernet cable is disconnected and Wi Fi is setto On Wi Fi Direct Setup Purpose To configure the Wi Fi Direct settings Values Wi Fi Direct Enable Enables the Wi Fi Direct connection Disable Disables the Wi Fi Direct connection When the network type is Ad hoc Wi Fi Direct is disabled Group Role Group Owner Sets your printer as the group owner for Wi Fi Direct Auto Automatically resolves the group role for Wi Fi Direct
120. a book or a brochure from the document glass When you scan documents using the document glass place them face down For more information see Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 Product Features 21 About the Printer Front View 1 Operator Panel Automatic Document Feeder ADF Document Feeder Tray Document Output Tray Toner Access Cover Print Head Cleaning Rod co OD A N Power Switch Standard 150 Sheet Tray oj om vw Front USB Port 22 About the Printer Rear View 12 1 ADF Cover 2 Ethernet Port 3 USB Port 4 Wall Jack Connector 5 Phone Connector 6 Power Connector 7 Rear Cover 8 Transfer Roller 9 Paper Chute 10 Paper Feed Roller 11 Transfer Belt 12 Levers 13 Security Slot About the Printer 23 Space Requirements Place the printer at a location that has adequate space to access the printer tray and covers 100 mm 3 94 inches 611 mm 24 05 inches 262 5 mm 10 33 inches 398 mm 15 67 inches 338 mm 13 30 inches x 670 mm 26 38 inches 24 Aboutthe Printer Automatic Document Feeder ADF ADF Cover Document Guides Document Glass A N gt Document Feeder Tray Operator Panel For more information on the operator panel see Operator Panel on page 70 About the Printer 25 Securing the Printer To protect your printer from theft you can use the opt
121. a one digit group dial location This allows you to use a group dial number setting to send the same document to all the destinations in the group K NOTE You need to register fax destinations in the speed dial beforehand K NOTE You cannot include one group dial number within another group dial number Setting Group Dial 1 Press the E Menu button 2 Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 3 Press the V button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 4 Press the V button until Phone Book is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 5 Press the V button until Group Dial is highlighted and then press the V Set button 6 Press the V button until the desired group dial number between 1 and 6 is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Name is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Enter the name and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Speed Dial No is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 10 Press the V button to move the cursor to the speed dial number you want to register in the group dial press the V Set button to select the number and then press the gt button 11 Ensure that Apply Settings is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 12 WhenAre You Sure is displayed ensure that Yes is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 13 To store more group dial numbers repeat steps 6 to 12
122. actory You can change the two digit number to whatever you choose For details on changing the code see Available Fax Settings Options on page 224 You can also receive the fax by pressing the gt Fax button when you hear the fax tones on the external telephone See Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode on page 233 K NOTE Set the dialing system of your external telephone to DTMF Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD Mode The DRPD is a telephone company service which allows a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers The particular number someone uses to call you on is identified by different ringing patterns which consist of various combinations of long and short ringing sounds Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection option Distinctive Ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company To set up Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection you will need another telephone line at your location or someone available to dial your fax number from outside To set up the DRPD 1 Press the El Menu button 2 Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 3 Press the V button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 4 Press the V button until Fax Settings is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 5 Press the V button until DRPD Pattern is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 6 P
123. ame enter the printer name in the Printer name text box and then click Next Installation starts 12 Ifyou do not share your printer select Do not share this printer If you share your printer select Share this printer so that others on your network can find and use it Click Next 13 As the driver installation is completed click Print a test page to verify installation To use this printer as the default printer select the Set as the default printer check box 14 Click Finish Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to monitor the status of your network printer without leaving your desk You can view and or change the printer settings monitor toner level and acknowledge the timing of ordering replacement consumables You can click the Dell supplies link for ordering supplies K NOTE The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is not available when the printer is directly connected to a computer or a print server To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool enter the printer s IP address in your web browser The printer configuration appears on the screen You can set up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to send you an e mail when the printer needs supplies or intervention To set up e mail alerts 1 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 2 Click E mail Alert 3 Enter the Primary SMTP Gateway Reply Address and your e mail address in the e mail list box 4 Click Apply New Settings Setting Up for Web Serv
124. ange or Create on the FAX Group top page Values FAX Group ID Displays the selected group ID Name Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for the group ID or enter a new group name Fax Speed Dial Address List to Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of speed dial codes indicated on the button ID Name Displays a speed dial code and the names of an entry registered under the speed dial code Speed dial codes without an entry show Not in Use in the Name column Phone Number Allows you to view or edit the fax number of an entry registered under the selected speed dial code or enter a fax number for the new entry Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings Back Click this button to return to the top page FAX Group Delete Purpose To delete the fax number group entries registered on the FAX Group page The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Delete on the FAX Group top page Values ID Displays the selected group ID Name Displays the name assigned for the group ID Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings Back Click this button to return to the top page Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 113 E mail Group Top Page Purpose To view the e mail address entries registered on the E mail Group page
125. appears Address ID El Specify an Address Number 1 Name 2 Server Type Computer Server 3 Computer Settings wizard 4 Server Name IP Address 5 Share Name 6 Path 7 Login Name 8 Login Password 9 Confirm Login Password 10 Port Number 139 Y Use Default Port Number Co To fill in the fields enter the information as follows 1 Name Enter a friendly name that you want to display on the Address Book 2 Server Type Select Computer if you store the document in a shared folder of your computer Select Server if you use a FTP server 3 Computer Settings Clicking this button opens the wizard screen which guides you through several steps wizard When you complete the steps in the wizard the items 4 to 10 are entered automatically For details click Help Scanning 213 4 Sever Name IP Address Enter a server name or IP address of your computer or the FTP server that you have shared out IPv4 and Pv6 are both supported The following are examples e For Computer Server name myhost IP address IPv4 192 0 2 1 e For Server Server name myhost example com myhost host name example com domain name IP address IPv4 192 0 2 1 5 Share Name Enter the name of the shared folder on the recipient computer For SMB only 6 Path For SMB To store the scanned document in the share folder dir
126. are click FAQ or Help of each software Dell Printer Hub Windows Only This software allows you to share print scan and store digital documents with cloud services It also notifies you of the firmware software updates printer status and toner level Tool Box Windows Only This allows you to view or specify the printer settings You can also diagnose the printer settings by using this software Address Book Editor This allows you to register and edit destinations for sending by fax the Scan to E mail feature and the Scan to Network Folder feature ES Address Book Editor ell Color MFP E525w Fax USB File Edit View Too Help la e x gt ow Search 1 B Address Books D Type D Name Register Updated On ce Asares Book A A a P va A m _ p e wie P Q ts OF A B PC Fax Address Book paaa Mi En HA do an Eo y de pit Dr A Piers tah amp roet Ep jane Dis po ijae m 1D 001 Group Name yA Members in Group eee ern VAR Lt Fhe Tem E 1 Read the Device Address Book entries from the printer to the Address Book Editor and read the PC Fax Address Book entries from the computer to the Address Book Editor 2 Allows you to edit a selected Address Book entry in the edit dialog box Deletes a selected Address Book entry Displays Address Book entries K NOTE You must install the fax driver before reading or editing the Address Book entries Understanding Your Pr
127. arge quantities By selecting appropriate print media and loading it properly you can avoid paper jams See the following instructions on loading print media e Loading Print Media in the Standard 150 Sheet Tray on page 168 e Avoiding Jams on page 276 If you experience a jam see Jam on page 300 for instructions Sending a Job to Print Install the printer driver to use all the features of the printer When you choose Print from an application a window representing the printer driver opens Select the appropriate settings for the specific job you are sending to print Print settings selected from the driver have precedence over the default menu settings selected from the operator panel or Tool Box You may need to click Preferences from the initial Print box to see all the available system settings you can change If you are not familiar with a feature in the printer driver window open the online Help for more information To print a job from a typical Microsoft Windows application 1 Open the file you want to print 2 From the File menu select Print 3 Verify that the correct printer is selected in the dialog box Modify the system settings as needed such as the pages you want to print or the number of copies 4 To adjust system settings not available from the first screen such as Quality Paper Size or Image Orientation click Preferences The Printing Preferences dialog box appears 5 Specify the print settings Fo
128. assword 3 Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model 4 Enter the following command in the terminal window sudo dpkg e Dell Color MFP E525w Enter the administrator password The printer driver is uninstalled 68 Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers CUPS Using Your Printer 12 0perator Panela data ascetic aren aera 70 13 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool co occconocooooo 15 14 Understanding the Printer Menus cocccccnococncnconononnonos 117 15 Print Media Guidelin s cccesssssesssessssssssssscsssssestessnessneees 162 16 Loading Print Media coccnconocicnnncononocccnnncononnonocrnoncononcnnonons 168 Operator Panel Using the Operator Panel Buttons 10 11 70 One Touch Dial button e Calls up the stored fax number registered in the Phone Book The first four fax numbers in the Phone Book are assigned to the buttons in row order starting from the top corner lt S Copy button e Displays the Copy menu lt gt Fax button e Displays the Fax menu Data LED e Lights up for incoming outgoing or pending fax jobs Ready Error LED e Lights up when the printer is ready Ready LED e Lights up when the printer has an error Error LED gt lt button e Moves a cursor to the right or left AV button e Moves a cursor up or down Y Set button e Confirms the entry of values N Contacts button e
129. at the toner cartridges are installed correctly See Installing a Toner Cartridge on page 264 Is the problem recovered The task is complete Go to action 2 2 If you use non Dell brand toner cartridges install Dell brand toner cartridges Is the problem recovered The task is complete Go to action 3 3 Clean up the fusing unit a Load one sheet of paper in the standard 150 sheet tray and then print a solid image all over paper b Load the printed sheet with the side to be printed on facing down and then print a blank sheet of paper Is the problem recovered The task is complete Contact Dell The Entire Output Is Blank If this issue appears contact Dell Streaks Appear on the Output pp If this issue appears contact Dell Troubleshooting 293 Pitched Color Dots ABC DEF If this issue appears contact Dell Vertical Blanks AB DE IIJ Action Yes No 1 Clean inside the printer and performing test print a Clean inside the printer by using the cleaning rod See Cleaning Inside the Printer on page 265 b Click Print Test Page in Printer properties of the printer driver Is the problem recovered The task is complete Contact Dell Mottle Action Yes No 1 Adjust the transfer bias a Launch the Tool Box click Adjust Transfer Roller on the Printer Maintenance tab b
130. ault is 2048 K bytes Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 89 Print from USB Defaults Purpose To create your own default settings for USB Direct Print Output Color Purpose To specify whether to print in black and white or print in color Values Full Color Black amp White Pages Per Side Purpose To print two or four pages per sheet Values Off Prints one page per sheet 2 Pages Per Side Prints two pages per sheet 4 Pages Per Side Prints four pages per sheet Auto Fit Purpose To proportionally enlarge or reduce images when you print your documents stored in USB memory Values Off Automatically reduces image when it is larger than the paper size Prints as is when image is smaller than the paper size Auto Automatically enlarges or reduces image to fit the paper size PDF Password Purpose To enter the password when you print the secure PDF job Fax Defaults Purpose To create your own default fax settings K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings 90 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Values Resolution Standard Suitable for documents with normal sized characters Fine Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot matrix printer Super Fine Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail The super fine mode is enabled only
131. ax mode or Ans Machine Fax mode you must attach an external telephone or answering machine to the phone connector amp on the back of your printer In the Telephone Fax mode if the printer receives an incoming fax the external telephone rings for the time specified in Auto Rec TEL FAX and then the printer automatically receives a fax In the Ans Machine Fax mode if the caller leaves a message the answering machine stores the message as it would normally If your printer hears a fax tone on the line it automatically starts to receive a fax K NOTE If you have set your printer to Ans Machine Fax and your answering machine is switched off or no answering machine is connected to your printer your printer will automatically go into the fax receive mode after a predefined time Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone This feature works best when you are using an external telephone connected to the phone connector Y on the back of your printer You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the external telephone without having to go to the printer When you receive a call on the external telephone and hear fax tones press the two digit number on the external telephone The printer receives the document Faxing 233 Press the buttons slowly in sequence If you still hear the fax tone from the remote machine try pressing the two digit keys once again The remote receive code is set to Of f at the f
132. b Tool on page 76 In the navigation panel on the left select Print Server Settings and click Google Cloud Print Click Register This Device to Google Cloud Print A sheet with a URL for the Google Cloud Print printer registration web site is printed From the web browser of your computer visit the Google web site and sign in with your Google account Visit the Google Cloud Print registration web site by entering the URL into your web browser You can also visit the site by scanning the OR code with your mobile device On the Google Cloud Print registration web site click Finish printer registration Click Manage your printers Your printer will be listed in the Printers list and will be ready for use with the Google Cloud Print service Printing via Google Cloud Print The printing procedure varies depending on the application or the device You can see the application list that supports Google Cloud Print service on the Google web site Printing From an Application on a Mobile Device The following procedure uses the Google Drive application on an Android mobile device as an example 1 oF WwW N Install the Google Drive application on your mobile device K NOTE You can download the application from Google Play Access the Google Drive application from your mobile device and tap gt to select the document Tap BB and then tap Print Select your printer from the list Select printer options and then tap Print Printing
133. b in the printer driver 290 Troubleshooting Print Quality Problems K NOTE In this section some procedures that use the Tool Box can also be performed using the operator panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool For information on how to use the operator panel and Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool see Understanding the Printer Menus on page 117 and Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool on page 75 The Output Is Too Light Action Yes No 1 If you use non Dell brand toner cartridges install Dell brand toner The task is complete Go to action 2 cartridges Is the problem recovered The toner cartridges may be low or need to be replaced The task is complete a Check if the LCD panel on the operator panel shows the message prompting you to replace a toner cartridge b Replace the toner cartridges as necessary Is the problem recovered Go to action 3 Verify that the print media is not damp and the correct print media is The task is complete used See Supported Paper Types on page 167 If not use the print media recommended for the printer Is the problem recovered Go to action 4 Verify that the Paper Type setting in the printer driver matches the print The task is complete media you loaded a On the General or Paper Output tab in Printing Preferences of the printer driver check the Paper Type setting b Load dry not damp and corrected print media and
134. bleshooting Auger Mark NS E OO NE TR Action Yes No 1 The toner cartridges may be low or need to be replaced The task is complete Go to action 2 a Check if the LCD panel on the operator panel shows the message prompting you to replace a toner cartridge b Replace the toner cartridges as necessary Is the problem recovered 2 Start Clean Developer The task is complete a Launch the Tool Box and click Clean Developer on the Printer Maintenance tab b Click Start Is the problem recovered Contact Dell Wrinkled Stained Paper PA ABC D EF Action Yes No 1 Remove the stack of paper from the standard 150 sheet tray rotate it The task is complete 180 degrees and then reload it in the tray Go to action 2 2 Verify that the correct print media is being used See Supported Paper The task is complete Sizes on page 166 and Print Media Guidelines on page 162 If not use the print media recommended for the printer Is the problem recovered If printing on an envelope go to action If printing on print media other than envelopes contact Dell Troubleshooting 297 Action Yes No 3 Check the crease Is the crease within 30 mm of the four edges of the This type of crease is Ifthe envelope is 220 envelope considered normal mm or longer C5 or Your printer is not at Envelope 10 go to fault action 4a If the envelope is
135. button K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Uncollated Does not sort the copy job Collated Sorts the copy job Auto Automatically determines which output mode for the copy job Customize the copy settings including the number of copies copy size contrast and image quality For more information see Setting Copy Options on page 191 Copying Reduce Enlarge To reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25 percent to 400 percent when you copy original documents from the document glass or ADE Z NOTE When you make a reduced copy black lines may appear at the bottom of your copy K NOTE This item is available only when Multiple Up is setto Of f or Manual 1 Ch WwW N Load the document s face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document s in first OR Place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 or Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 Press the GB Copy button Press the V button until Preferences is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Reduce Enlarge is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button to select the desired settings and then press the vV Set button mm series K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default m
136. ck if the file format is correct 016 797 Press the Y Set button to clear the message Check if the USB memory is securely connected 016 920 Press the Set button Check the wireless setting for the access point and the printer and try wireless 016 921 settings again 016 930 Remove the unsupported device from the USB port 016 931 016 981 Press the Y Set button to cancel the current print job If you are copying using Collated change the setting to Uncollated and try copying again See Setting Copy Options on page 191 016 982 The printer memory is full and cannot continue processing the current print job Press the Y Set button to clear the message and cancel the current print job 016 985 Press the Y Set button Retry scanning by lowering the resolution setting or changing the file format of the 017 970 scanned image 017 980 Press the Y Set button to clear the message 017 981 017 988 024 360 Turn off the printer and then on If this does not solve the problem contact Dell See Contacting Dell on page 310 024 914 Load the specified paper and press the Y Set button See Loading Print Media in the Standard 150 Sheet Tray on page 168 024 946 Press the Set button to clear the message Check for any misfed paper in the standard 150 sheet tray and set the tray to the printer 024 969 Load the specified paper and press the Y Set button See Loading Print Media in the Standard 150 Sheet Tray on page 168
137. copy quality and increase the toner consumption NOTE If you are copying a page from a book or magazine lift the document cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the cover If the book or magazine is thicker than 20 mm start copying with the cover open 4 Customize the copy settings including the number of copies copy size contrast and image quality For more information see Setting Copy Options on page 191 To clear the settings press the X Cancel button 5 Ensure that Start Copy is highlighted and then press the gt Start button to start copying K NOTE Press the X Cancel button to cancel a copy job while scanning a document 190 Copying Making Copies From the ADF NM CAUTION Do not load more than 15 sheets into the ADF or allow more than 15 sheets to be fed to the ADF output tray The ADF EZ EZ 1 3 K output tray should be emptied before it exceeds 15 sheets or your original documents may be damaged NOTE To get the best scan quality especially for grayscale images use the document glass instead of the ADF NOTE A computer connection is not required for copying Load up to 15 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib documents face up on the ADF with top edge of the documents in first Then adjust the document guides to the correct document size E O NOTE Ensure that you use the document guides before copying a legal size document Customize the copy settings including the numbe
138. cting Dell on 124 333 page 310 134 211 191 310 193 700 This message indicates the printer is in the non Dell toner mode 254 Understanding Printer Messages Specifications Operating System Compatibility Your Dell Color Multifunction Printer E525w is compatible with Microsoft Windows Vista Windows Vista 64 bit Edition Windows 7 Windows 7 64 bit Edition Windows 8 Windows 8 64 bit Edition Windows 8 1 Windows 8 1 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2012 R2 Mac OS X 10 6 OS X 10 7 OS X 10 8 OS X 10 9 OS X 10 10 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 1 Desktop x86 SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 and Ubuntu 12 04 Power Supply Rated voltage 220 240 VAC 110 127 VAC Frequency 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz Current 5 0A 70A Power consumption 30 0 W Ready 30 0 W Ready 10 0 W Sleep 10 0 W Sleep 2 8 W Deep Sleep 2 0 W Deep Sleep 0 W Offline 0 W Offline This condition is equivalent to Network standby mode the power consumption in this condition is that all wired network ports are connected and all wireless network ports are activated Dimensions Height 353 mm 13 90 inches Width 410 mm 16 14 inches Depth 398 mm 15 67 inches Weight only the toner cartridges are included 16 1 kg 35 49 Ib
139. d in the standard 150 sheet tray Display Popup Sets whether to display a popup menu that prompts the user to set the paper size and type when paper is loaded in the standard 150 sheet tray Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings 116 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Understanding the Printer Menus When your printer is configured as a network printer available to a number of users the access to the administrator menu should be limited This prevents unauthorized users from using the operator panel to inadvertently change the default menu settings that have been set by the administrator However you can select settings for individual print jobs using the printer driver Print settings selected from the printer driver have precedence over the default menu settings selected from the operator panel Defaults Settings Use this menu to configure the default copy scan and fax settings of the printer Copy Defaults Use this menu to configure a variety of copy features K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Color Purpose To set whether to make copies in color or in black and white Values Black amp White Prints in black and white mode Color Prints in color mode Collated Purpose To sort the copy job Values Uncollated Does not sort th
140. data to arrive from the computer Available Range 5 300sec 150 Understanding the Printer Menus Date amp Time Purpose To set the date and time and regional time zone of the printer Values Set Date Specifies the current date Set Time Specifies the current time Date Format yy mm dd Specifies the date format mm dd yy dd mm yy Time Format 12H Specifies the time format 24H Time Zone Specifies the time zone 4 The default varies depending on country specific factory default Alert Tone Purpose To configure settings for tones emitted by the printer during operation or when a warning message appears Values Panel Select Tone Off Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is correct Low Emits a tone at the specified volume when the operator panel input is correct Medium High Panel Alert Tone Off Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is incorrect Low Emits a tone at the specified volume when the operator panel input is incorrect Medium High Auto Clear Alert Off Does not emit a tone before the printer performs auto clear Low Emits a tone at the specified volume 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear Medium High Job Tone Off Does not emit a tone when a job is complete Low Emits a tone at the specified volume when a job is complete Medium High Alert Tone Off Does not emit a tone when a problem occurs Low Em
141. dows Server 2012 R2 A list of available printers appears 2 Right click the printer that you selected when you sent the job for print and then select See what s printing 3 Select the printer driver A list of print jobs appears in the printer window Select the job you want to cancel Press lt Delete gt on the keyboard 178 Printing Using the Secure Print Feature You can store print jobs secured with a password in the memory Users with the password can print them from the operator panel This feature can be used to print confidential documents Enter the password from Print data the operator panel Confidential 1 K NOTE The Secure Print feature is available only when RAM Disk under System Settings is enabled K NOTE If a print job is too large for the memory available the printer may display an error message K NOTE The Secure Print feature is available when using the PCL or PostScript 3 Compatible driver Procedures for Secure Print When you send a job to the printer you can specify the information such as user ID password and job name in the printer driver to store the job in the memory When you are ready to print the job select the desired job name in the memory using the operator panel The following are procedures for storing and printing jobs Storing Print Jobs To use the Secure Print feature select Secure Print for Job Type and specify the User ID Password and Document Name by click
142. dry cotton swab 4 Close the rear cover 5 Tum on the printer Adjusting Color Registration This section describes how to adjust the color registration when you first install the printer or after moving it to a new location K NOTE A password is required to enter Admin Menu when Panel Lock Set is setto Enable In this case enter the password you specified and press the y Set button Performing Auto Adjust Auto Adjust allows you to correct the color registration automatically Operator Panel 1 Press the E Menu button 2 Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 3 Press the V button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the vA Set button 4 Press the V button until Maintenance is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 5 Press the V button until Adjust ColorRegi is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 6 Ensure that Auto Adjust is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Maintaining Your Printer 269 7 Ensure that Are You Sure is displayed press the V button to select Yes and then press the Y Set button Auto adjust is performed Tool Box 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Dell Printers gt Dell Printer Hub Dell Printer Hub opens Select Dell Color MFP E525w print driver at My Printers Click on the link Tool Box from list at the left side of the page K NOTE The Select Printer window appears in this step when mu
143. e Envelope 10 4 125 x 9 5 in e DL 110 x 220 mm e Letter 8 5 x 11 in Legal 8 5 x 14 in e Folio 8 5 x 13 in e Executive 7 25 x 10 5 in Custom 1 You can place the originals in a long edge feed direction or in a short edge feed direction For details about long edge or short edge feed direction see Loading Envelopes on page 171 2 Custom width 76 2 mm 3 00 inches to 215 9 mm 8 50 inches Custom length 127 0 mm 5 00 inches to 355 6 mm 14 00 inches 3 On Windows Vista Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Server 2012 only the administrator can set and modify the custom paper size from the printer driver 166 Print Media Guidelines Supported Paper Types Paper Type Specifications Plain Plain Side 2 Plain Thick Plain Thick Side 2 Recycled Recycled Side 2 Label Covers Covers Side 2 Envelope Coated Coated Side 2 Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Paper type Weight g m Remarks Plain Paper 60 90 Plain Thick Paper 91 105 E Covers 106 163 Coated 106 163 Inkjet printer paper cannot be used Label Inkjet printer paper cannot be used Envelope Recycled 60 105 Print Media Guidelines 167 Loading Print Media Loading print media properly helps prevent jams and ensures trouble free printing Before loading print media identify the recommended print side of the print media This information is usually ind
144. e Y Set button To check the detailed information of the destination press the button e Press the gt button repeatedly to display TO or BCC as a destination type and then press the Y Set button To search destinations from Address Book a Press the V button until Search Address Book is highlighted and then press the Y Set button b Use the numeric keypad to enter the first character of the personal or group names whose destinations you want to specify and then press the Y Set button Destinations with names beginning with the specified character are displayed c Press the V button to move the cursor to the desired destination To check the detailed information of the destination press the button d Press the gt button repeatedly to display TO or BCC as a destination type and then press the Y Set button To search destinations from LDAP Server K NOTE The printer needs to be configured in order to access an LDAP server See Authentication System and LDAP Server on page 108 a Pressthe V button until Search Network Address Book is highlighted and then press the Y Set button b Use the numeric keypad to enter the first character of the personal or group names whose destinations you want to specify and then press the Y Set button Destinations with names beginning with the specified character are displayed c Press the V button to move the cursor to the desired destination To check the detailed inf
145. e by turning up the value for your printing media c Click Apply New Settings Is the problem recovered The task is complete Go to action 4 4 Ifyou use non recommended print media use the print media recommended for the printer Is the problem recovered The task is complete Contact Dell Troubleshooting 295 Fog ABC DIEE Action Yes No Is the whole page printed light Contact Dell Go to action 2 Start Clean Developer a Launch the Tool Box and click Clean Developer on the Printer Maintenance tab b Click Start Is the problem recovered The task is complete Go to action 3 Start Toner Refresh Mode a Launch the Tool Box and click Toner Refresh Mode on the Printer Maintenance tab b Select the color that is the same as the fog Is the problem recovered The task is complete Go to action 4 Start Toner Refresh Mode again Is the problem recovered The task is complete Contact Dell Bead Carry Out BCO Action Yes No 1 If the printer is installed in a high altitude location set the altitude of the location a Launch the Tool Box and click Environmental Sensor Info on the Printer Maintenance tab b Click Adjust Altitude c Select the value close to the altitude of the location where the printer is installed Is the problem recovered The task is complete Contact Dell 296 Trou
146. e cloud wc using the app For downloading the app please visit Microsoft Windows Store Google Play Store and Apple App Store For more information about using Dell Document Hub see the FAQs in Dell com documenthub Sending an E mail With the Scanned Image Scan to E mail Scan to E mail feature allows you to send scanned data by attaching to e mail You can choose destination e mail addresses from the Address Book on the printer or server Also you can enter the address directly using the numeric keypad on the operator panel For more information see Sending an E mail With the Scanned Image on page 216 Making Copies From the ADF You can scan sheets of unbound paper simultaneously from the automatic document feeder ADF When you scan documents using the ADE load them face up For more information see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 Dell Printer Hub A la a Dell Printer Hub is the program that monitors and informs you of the printer s status and allows you to customize the printer settings In addition to the same features as Dell Document Hub Dell Printer Hub notifies you of the firmware software updates When you install the drivers for this printer this program is also automatically installed For more information open the program and click 2 on the top right of the main window to see the FAQs Making Copies From the Document Glass You can scan the pages of
147. e copy job Collated Sorts the copy job Auto Automatically determines which output mode for the copy job Reduce Enlarge Purpose To set the default copy reduction enlargement ratio Understanding the Printer Menus 117 Values mm series 200 A5 gt A4 141 A5 gt B5 122 100 B5 gt A5 81 A4 gt A5 70 50 inch series 200 Stmt gt Lgl 154 Stmt gt Ltr 129 100 Lgl gt Ltr 78 Ldgr gt Ltr 64 50 Z NOTE You can also use the numeric keypad to input the desired zoom ratio from 25 to 400 or press gt to enlarge the zoom ratio or press lt to reduce the zoom ratio in 1 intervals K NOTE This item is available only when Multiple Up is setto Of f or Manual Document Size Purpose To specify the default document size Values A4 210 x 297 mm A5 148 x 210 mm B5 182 x 257 mm Letter 8 5 x 11 Folio 8 5 x 13 Legal 8 5 x 14 Executive 7 25 x 10 5 1 The default varies depending on country specific factory default 118 Understanding the Printer Menus Original Type Purpose To select the copy image quality Values Text Suitable for documents with text Text amp Photo Suitable for documents with both text and photos gray tones Photo Suitable for documents with photos Lighter Darker Purpose To set the default copy density level Values Lighter
148. e for LPD or Port 9100 Initialize NVM Purpose To initialize network data stored in NVM non volatile memory After executing this function and rebooting the printer all network settings are reset to their default values Values Yes Initializes network data stored in NVM No Does not initialize network data stored in NVM PS Data Format Purpose To specify the PostScript 3 Compatible communication protocol You can configure the PS Data Format settings for the wired network Values Auto Sets the PostScript 3 Compatible communications protocol automatically Standard Sets the PostScript 3 Compatible communications protocol to Standard BCP Sets the PostScript 3 Compatible communications protocol to BCP TBCP Sets the PostScript 3 Compatible communications protocol to TBCP Wi Fi Purpose To enable the wireless connection Values Off Disables the wireless connection On Enables the wireless connection K NOTE This item is available only when the Ethernet cable is disconnected K NOTE When you use the USB connection and do not use the wireless connection you need to disable the wireless LAN Fax Settings Use this menu to configure the basic fax settings K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings 142 Understanding the Printer Menus Receive Mode Purpose To select the default fax receiving mode Values Tel
149. e mail alert feature using up to 255 alphanumeric characters Select Alerts for List 2 Supplies Alerts Specifies whether to receive an e mail alert for consumables Paper Handling Alerts Specifies whether to receive an e mail alert for paper handling and or service calls Scan to PC Purpose To specify the client when scanning data Values FTP Client Connection Time Out Sets the connection time out period from 1 to 60 seconds FTP Passive Sets whether to enable the FTP Passive mode SMB Client Connection Time Out Sets the connection time out period from 1 to 60 seconds Google Cloud Print Purpose To register the printer to Google Cloud Print Values Google Cloud Print Registration state Displays the Google Cloud Print registration state Register This Device to Click to register the printer to Google Cloud Print Google Cloud Print Cancel Registration Click to cancel to register the printer to Google Cloud Print 1 Available only when using IPv4 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 105 Proxy Server Purpose To configure the proxy server settings Values Proxy Server Use Proxy Server Sets whether to enable the use of a proxy server Server Name Sets the name of the proxy server Port Number Sets the port number from to 65535 Authentication Sets whether to enable authentication Login Name Sets the login name for the pro
150. e num ro d enregistrement signifie que l enregistrement s est effectu conform ment a une d claration de conformit et indique que les sp cifications techniques d Industrie Canada ont t respect es Il n implique pas qu Industrie Canada a approuv le mat riel L indice d quivalence de la sonnerie IES du pr sent mat riel est de 0 0 L IES assign chaque dispositif terminal indique le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent tre raccord s une interface t l phonique La terminaison d une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs la seule condition que la somme d indices d quivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n exc de pas 5 Appendix
151. e ring tone which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone Fax Line Type Sets the line type Tone Pulse Sets the dialing type Resend Delay Specifies the interval between transmission attempts Redial Attempts Specifies the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax number is busy If you enter 0 the printer will not redial Redial Delay Specifies the interval between redial attempts Junk Fax Setup Sets whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers by accepting faxes only from the fax numbers registered in the Phone Book Remote Receive Sets whether to receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone Remote Rev Tone Specifies the remote receive code in two digits to start Remote Receive Fax Header Sets whether to print the information of sender on the header of faxes Fax Header Name Sets the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes Up to 30 alphanumeric characters can be entered Fax Number Sets the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of faxes Fax Cover Page Sets whether to attach a cover page to faxes DRPD Pattern Sets the DRPD setting from Pattern 1 to Pattern 7 DRPD is a service provided by some telephone 224 Faxing companies Option Forward Settings Description Off Does not forward received faxes Forward Only Forward
152. e server and look for the shared name you assigned to the printer After you have checked that the printer is shared use methods such as Windows Point and Print to use the shared printer from a network client K NOTE If the OS bit editions 32 64 bit edition differ between a print server and a client computer you need to manually add the printer driver for the client computer edition on the server Otherwise the printer driver cannot be installed on the client computer using methods such as Point and Print For example if the print server runs on Windows Vista 32 bit edition while the client computer runs on Windows 7 64 bit edition follow the procedures below to additionally install the printer driver for 64 bit client on the 32 bit server a Click Additional Drivers on the screen for sharing printers For details about how to display this screen see Enabling Shared Printing From the Computer on page 57 b Select the x64 check box and then click OK c Insert the Software and Documentation disc into your computer d Click Browse to specify the folder that contains the 64 bit OS driver and then click OK Installation starts Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows 59 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh Installing the Drivers and Software 0 JJ O O FF UN Run the Software and Documentation disc on the Macintosh computer Double click the Dell Color MFP E525w Installer icon
153. e to your desired location D Driver XPS Win_7Vista XPS V3_E525w zip where D is the drive letter of the optical drive Click Start gt Devices and Printers Click Add a printer Click Add a local printer Select the port connected to this printer and then click Next Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box Click Browse and then select the extracted folder in step 1 Click OK Select your printer name and click Next To change the printer name enter the printer name in the Printer name text box and then click Next Installation starts If you do not share your printer select Do not share this printer If you share your printer select Share this printer so that others on your network can find and use it Click Next As the driver installation is completed click Print a test page to verify installation To use this printer as the default printer select the Set as the default printer check box Click Finish For Windows 8 Windows 8 64 bit Edition Windows 8 1 Windows 8 1 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2012 or Windows Server 2012 R2 1 91 oo Ny OOO A Extract the following zip file to your desired location D Drivers XPS Win_8 XPS V4_E525w zip where D is the drive letter of the optical drive Right click the bottom left corner of the screen and then click Control Panel Click Hardware and Sound Hardware for Windows Server 2012 and Windows Server 2012 R2 gt Devices and Pr
154. earches the access points on wireless network 6 Press the V button until the desired access point is highlighted and then press the Y Set button If the desired access point does not appear go to Manual SSID Setup on page 33 K NOTE Some hidden SSID may not be displayed If the SSID is not detected turn on SSID broadcast from the router 7 Enter the passphrase or WEP key When the encryption type of the selected access point is WPA WPA2 or Mixed in step 6 Enter the passphrase and then press the Y Set button When the encryption type of the selected access point is WEP in step 6 e Enter the WEP key and then press the Y Set button K NOTE A passphrase is an encryption key for WPA and WPA2 encryption which consists of 8 to 63 bytes ASCII or 8 to 64 bytes Hex It may be described as a key on some access points or routers For details refer to the manual supplied with the access point or router When the wireless LAN connection setting is completed the Wi Fi WPS button lights up 32 Connecting Your Printer Manual SSID Setup K NOTE A password is required to enter Admin Menu when Panel Lock Set is setto Enable In this case enter the 0 Nuy O 0O A UO N 10 password you specified and press the V Set button Press the E Menu button Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the W button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button
155. ectly without creating any subfolder leave the space blank To store the scanned document in the folder you created under the share folder enter the path as following Example Share Folder name MyShare Second level folder name MyPic Third level folder name John You should now see MyShare MyPic John in your directory ES MyShare Share folder L MyPic L John In this case enter the following item Path MyPic John For FTP Enter the path to store the scanned document Login Name Enter the user account name that has access to the shared folder on your computer or FTP server Login Password Enter the password corresponding to the above login name NOTE Empty password is not valid when scanned documents are sent via the SMB protocol Ensure that you have a valid password for the user login account See Confirming a Login Name and Password on page 206 for details on how to add a password in your user login account Confirm Login Password Re enter your password 10 Port Number Enter the Server Port Number If you are unsure you can enter the default value of 139 for SMB and 21 for FTP After you configured settings go to Sending the Scanned File to a Computer or Server on page 215 214 Scanning Sending the Scanned File to a Computer or Server 1 Load the document s face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document s in first OR Place a single document
156. ed to the Dell Printer Supplies website Yellow Cartridge Level Black Cartridge Level Paper Trays Status Ready Indicates that there is some paper in the tray but the quantity is unknown Add Paper Indicates that there is no paper in the tray Capacity Displays the maximum capacity of the paper tray Size Displays the size of paper in the tray Output Tray Status OK Indicates that the tray is available Capacity Displays the maximum capacity of the output tray Cover Status Closed Indicates that the cover is closed Open Indicates that the cover is open Printer Type Displays the type of the printer Color Laser is displayed normally Printing Speed Displays the printing speed Printer Events Purpose To check the details of all alerts or indications of faults displayed in the Printer Events page when any faults such as Out of Paper or Rear Coveris Open occur Values Location Displays the location where the error occurred Details Displays the details of the error Printer Information Purpose To display the system information of the printer This page can also be displayed by clicking Printer Information in the left frame Values Dell Service Tag Number Displays Dell s service tag number Asset Tag Number Displays the asset tag number of the printer Printer Serial Number Displays the serial number of the printer Memory Capacity Displays the memory capacity Processo
157. ems Windows Vista Windows Vista 64 bit Edition Windows 7 Windows 7 64 bit Edition Windows 8 Windows 8 64 bit Edition Windows 8 1 Windows 8 1 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2012 and Windows Server 2012 R2 K NOTE When the User Account Control dialog box appears during installation click Continue or Yes if you are an administrator on the computer otherwise contact your administrator to continue the desired action For Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64 bit Edition 1 oo wn OO oO Eh WwW NN 11 12 Extract the following zip file to your desired location D Driver XPS Win_7Vista XPS V3_E525w zip where D is the drive letter of the optical drive Click Start gt Control Panel Hardware and Sound gt Printers Click Add a printer Click Add a local printer Select the port connected to this printer and then click Next Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box Click Browse and then select the extracted folder in step 1 Click OK Select your printer name and click Next To change the printer name enter the printer name in the Printer name text box and then click Next To use this printer as the default printer select the Set as the default printer check box and then click Next Installation starts As the driver installation is completed click Print a test page to verify ins
158. ent s face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document s in first OR Place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 or Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 2 Press the B Copy button 3 Press the V button until Preferences is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 4 Press the V button until Margin Top Bottomis highlighted and then press the Y Set button 5 Press the V or A button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad and then press the Y Set button K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings 4 mm 0 2 inch Specify the value in increments of 1 mm 0 1 inch Available Range 0 50 mm 0 0 2 0 inch Copying 197 Margin Left Right To specify the left and right margins of the copy 1 0 Aa Ww N Load the document s face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document s in first OR Place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 or Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 Press the GB Copy button Press the V button until Preferences is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Margin Left Right is highlighted and then press the Y Set button
159. entication Method Displays the type of authentication method used for IPsec Pre Shared Key Sets a shared key Up to 255 alphanumeric characters periods and hyphens can be used Re enter Pre Shared Key Enters the shared key again to confirm it IKE SA Lifetime Sets the lifetime for IKE SA from 5 to 28 800 minutes IPsec SA Lifetime Sets the lifetime for IPsec SA from 5 to 2 880 minutes DH Group Sets the DH group PFS Select the check box to enable the PFS setting Remote peers IPv4 address Sets the IP address to connect to Remote peers IPv6 address Sets the IP address to connect to Non IPsec communication policy Allows communication with a device which does not support IPsec K NOTE If IPsec is enabled with incorrect settings you must disable it using the IPsec menu on the operator panel 110 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Display Network Settings Purpose To show or hide network information in the message field of the top menu screen Values Show IPv4 Address Shows the IPv4 address of the printer Show Host Name Shows the host name of the printer Hide Network Information Does not show network information IP Filter IPv4 Purpose To specify the IP address and subnet mask to be permitted or denied access to the printer Values Access List Displays the list of IP addresses that are permitted or denied
160. entries for the group of user IDs indicated on the button ID Name Displays a user ID and the name of the user registered under that user ID IDs without an entry show Not in Use in the Name column Phone Number Displays the phone number of the user E mail Address Displays the e mail address of the user Delete Deletes the entry for the selected user ID Confirm Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry of the selected user ID Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected user ID Address Book Confirm Change Create Purpose To view or edit the Address Book entries on the Address Book page or create a new entry The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm Change or Create on the Address Book top page Values ID Fax Speed Dial Displays the selected user ID Name Allows you to view or edit the name of the user registered under the user ID or enter a name for the new entry Phone Number Allows you to view or edit the phone number of the user or enter a phone number for the new entry E mail Address Allows you to view or edit the e mail address of the user or enter an e mail address for the new entry Delete Click this button to delete the entry for the user ID This button is available only on the dialog box for editing an existing entry Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings Restore
161. enu settings 200 A5 gt A4 141 A5 gt B5 122 100 B5 gt A5 81 A4 gt A5 70 50 inch series 200 Stmt gt Lgl 154 Stmt gt Ltr 129 100 Lgl gt Ltr 78 Ldgr gt Ltr 64 50 K NOTE You can also use the numeric keypad to input the desired zoom ratio from 25 to 400 or press the gt button to enlarge the zoom ratio or press the lt button to reduce the zoom ratio in 1 intervals Copying 193 Document Size To specify the default document size 1 0 Aa Ww N Load the document s face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document s in first OR Place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 or Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 Press the GB Copy button Press the V button until Preferences is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the W button until Document Size is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the W button to select the desired settings and then press the Y Set button K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings A4 210 x 297 mm A5 148 x 210 mm B5 182 x 257 mm Letter 8 5 x 11 Folio 8 5 x 13 Legal 8 5 x 14 Executive 7 25 x 10 5 1 The default
162. ephone Automatic fax reception is turned off You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external telephone and then pressing the remote receive code Fax Automatically receives faxes Telephone Fax When the printer receives an incoming fax the external telephone rings for the time specified in Auto Rec TEL FAX and then the printer automatically receives a fax If an incoming call is not a fax the printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call Ans Machine Fax The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine In this mode the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones If the phone communication is using serial transmission in your country such as Germany Sweden Denmark Austria Belgium Italy France and Switzerland this mode is not supported DRPD Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD option a distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company After the telephone company has provided a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring pattern Auto Rec Fax Purpose To set the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call The interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds The default is 0 seconds Auto Rec TEL FAX Purpose To set
163. er and iPod touch 3rd generation or later running arerint the latest version of iOS AirPrint also allows you to accomplish basic network printing with Macintosh OS X 10 7 or later without installing additional drivers Setting Up AirPrint on Your Printer To use AirPrint Bonjour mDNS and IPP protocols are required on your printer Make sure that Bonjour mDNS and IPP are set to Enable on the operator panel menu For details see Protocol on page 141 Bonjour mDNS and IPP can also be enabled by selecting Enable AirPrint check box from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Follow the procedure below to configure the environment settings for AirPrint using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 1 Ensure that the printer is connected to the network 2 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser For more information see Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool on page 75 and Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool on page 76 Printing 185 3 In the navigation panel scroll down to Print Server Settings and click AirPrint 4 Click Turn On AirPrint in the Enable AirPrint field The printer is ready for AirPrint K NOTE If the Enable AirPrint check box is not active it means that both Bonjour mDNS and IPP are already set to Enable onthe operator panel menu and the printer is ready for AirPrint Printing via Ai
164. er Jams 277 Clearing Paper Jams From the ADF 278 Clearing Paper Jams From the Front ofthe Printer 282 Clearing Paper Jams From the Back of the Printer 282 Contents 13 Clearing Paper Jams From the Output Tray 284 Troubleshooting cintia 5 4 bee bi aloe rd ted ae dd 288 27 Troubleshooting 25 pi e A a 289 Basic Printer Problems 0 o o o o 289 Display Problems o o o o o ooo 289 Printing Problems o o o o o 289 Print Quality Problems o o eee 291 The Output Is Too Light o o e 291 Toner Smears or Print Comes Off Stain on Back Side 292 Random Spots Blurred Images o o 293 The Entire Output Is Blank 0 o 293 Streaks Appear on the Output aoa 293 Pitched Color D ts s 2 002 De wed rt 294 Vertical Blanks n oasis ee Re ee ee 294 Mottle out ba Bee OR Sa EER es PER rta 294 Ghosting senan e Ae at ek bar ad Beacon eh i a Ba 295 PO aa ew Pak ae eee ea ee eae 296 Bead Carry Dut BCO o o 296 Auger Mare record o o o ide Lo cod fe fe i 297 Wrinkled Stained Paper o o ee ee 297 The Top Margins Are Incorrect o o eee 298 Color Registration Is Out of Alignment 299 Protrudent Bumpy Paper o
165. ermine whether the pre printed letterhead you have selected is acceptable for laser printers Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead Use the following illustration for help when loading letterhead in the print media sources Print Media Guidelines 163 Loading Letterhead Load the letterhead in the printer with the print side facing up Ensure that the title on the letterhead enters the printer first Selecting Pre punched Paper Pre punched paper brands can differ in the number and placement of holes and in manufacturing techniques However it may not be possible to print on the paper to depending on the placement of holes on the paper To select and use pre punched paper Test paper from several manufacturers before ordering and using large quantities of pre punched paper Paper should be punched at the paper manufacturer and not drilled into paper already packaged in a ream Drilled paper can cause jams when multiple sheets feed through the printer This may result in a paper jam Pre punched paper can include more paper dust than standard paper Your printer may require more frequent cleaning and feed reliability may not be as good as standard paper Weight guidelines for pre punched paper are the same as non punched paper Envelopes Depending on the choice of envelopes it is possible to expect variable levels of light wrinkling Before buying large quantities of any print media it is recommended that
166. ernet Explorer are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Apple Bonjour iPad iPhone Pod touch Macintosh Mac OS and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc Android Google Chrome Gmail Google Google Cloud Print Google Drive and Google Play are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc Adobe PostScript and Photoshop are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Wi 7and Wi i Direct are registered trademark of the Wi Fi Alliance Wi 7 Protected Setup WPA and WPA2 are trademarks of the Wi Fi Alliance Red Hat and Red Hat Enterprise Linux are registered trademarks of Red Hat Inc in the U S and other countries SUSE is a registered trademark of Novell Inc in the United States and other countries Thinxtream is a trademark of Thinxtream Technologies Pte Ltd OR Code is a registered trademark of Denso Wave Incorporated PCL is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Corporation in the United States and or other countries XML Paper Specitication XPS This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation The terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property may be found at http go microsoft com fwlink LinkId 52369 Other
167. error occurs Fax Protocol Sets whether to print a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs Country Sets the country where the printer is used Printer Maintenance This tab contains the Paper Density Adjust Transfer Roller Adjust Fusing Unit Auto Registration Adjustment Color Registration Adjustment Clean Developer Adjust Altitude Reset Defaults Non Dell Toner Clock Settings and Web Link Customization pages Paper Density Purpose To specify the paper density Values Plain Sets the paper density of plain paper Label Sets the paper density of labels Adjust Transfer Roller Purpose To specify the optimum voltage settings for printing for the transfer roller To decrease the voltage set negative values To increase the voltage set positive values The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types If you see mottles on the printed paper try to increase the voltage If you see white spots on the printed paper try to decrease the voltage K NOTE The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 93 Values Plain Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for plain paper within the range of 3 to 3 Plain Thick Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for thick plain paper within the range of 3 to
168. es Do not use labels that have exposed adhesive Use full label sheets Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing resulting in a jam Do not use label sheets that have adhesive to the edge of the sheet It is recommended that zone coating of the adhesive is done at least 1 mm 0 04 inches away from edges Adhesive material contaminates your printer and could void your warranty WARNING Otherwise a jam occurs in the printer and contaminate your printer and your cartridges with adhesive As a result could void your printer and cartridge warranties Print Media Guidelines 165 Storing Print Media For proper print media storage the following guidelines help avoid media feeding problems and uneven print quality e For best results store print media in an environment where the temperature is approximately 21 C 70 F and the relative humidity is 40 e Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf rather than directly on the floor e If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton ensure that they rest on a flat surface so that the edges do not buckle or curl e Do not place anything on top of the print media packages Identifying Print Media and Specifications This section provides information on supported paper sizes types and specification Supported Paper Sizes e A4 210 x 297 mm e B5 182 x 257 mm e AS 148 x 210 mm e C5 162 x 229 mm e Monarch 3 875 x 7 5 in
169. es for Secure Print o o oo o e 179 Direct Print Using the USB Memory USB Direct Print 180 Supported File Formats 0 ee eee eens 180 Printing a File in a USB Memory o o o o e 180 Printing With Wi Fi Direct od tc le dd 181 Setting Up Wi Fi Direct o o e eee 181 Printing via Wi Fi Direct o o eo e 183 Disconnecting Wi Fi Direct Network o o 183 Resetting the Passphrase o o o e 184 Resetting the PIN Code 0 o e e 184 Mobile Printing o o e e 185 Android OS rias a ido do 185 AppleiOS i e ar a a Aa 185 Printing With AirPrint o o eee 185 Setting Up AirPrint on Your Printer o o 185 Printing via AirPrint aaa aa 186 Printing With Google Cloud Print ooo 186 Preparing to Use the Printer with Google Cloud Print 186 Registering the Printer to Your Google Account 187 Printing via Google Cloud Pridt o o oo o 187 Printing a ReportPage o o e e 188 TE COPYING saaa Md ee ae a eee ano ene Ye 189 Loading PaperforCopying 202 000000 189 PreparingaDocument 0 000002 aes 189 Making Copies From the DocumentGlass 189 Making Copies From the ADF 005 191
170. es the copy sharper than the original Sharper Normal Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original Softer Makes the copy softer than the original Softest Copying 195 Auto Exposure To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy 1 2 3 4 5 Load the document s face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document s in first OR Place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 or Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 Press the GB Copy button Press the V button until Preferences is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Auto Exposure is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the W button until On is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Multiple Up To print two original images to fit onto one sheet of paper 196 Ml IIA LL A IN N 104 MN HN Auto Manual Automatically Reduces the size of reduces the size of images in the custom size images to fit in one according to the setting of page the Reduce Enlarge menu Copying 1 Load the document s face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document s in first OR Place a single document face down
171. es with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation RF Exposure Warning This equipment must be installed and operated in accordance with provided instructions and the antenna s used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter End users and installers must be provide with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance Canada Industry Canada IC Notices This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 and RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device 312 Appendix Radio Frequency RF Exposure Information The radiated output power of the Wireless Device is below the Industry Canada IC radio frequency exposure limits The Wireless Device should be used in such a manner such that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized This device has also been evaluated and shown compliant with the IC RF Exposure l
172. ess the Y Set button Press the W button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Fax Settings is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Line Type is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until PBX is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the Back button to return to the previous menu Faxing 225 Press the V button until Prefix Dial is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until On is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press the Back button to return to the previous menu Press the V button until Prefix Dial Num is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Enter an up to five digit prefix number from 0 9 and Press the Y Set button when the prefix dial number on the display is correct Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on Sending a Fax You can fax data from your printer Sending a Fax Automatically 1 Load the document s face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document s in first OR Place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 or Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 Press the lt amp Fax button Enter the fax number of the remote fax machine using t
173. ether the contents of the errors concerning PostScript 3 Compatible page description language are printed PS Job Time Out Sets the execution time for one PostScript 3 Compatible job Output Color Sets whether to print in color or in black and white Image Depth Sets the image depth to 1 bit or 2 bit depth PDF Settings Purpose To change the PDF settings Values Quantity Sets the number of copies Print Mode Sets a print mode PDF Password Sets a password required to print a PDF file secured with a document open password Paper Size Sets the output paper size Layout Sets the output layout Output Color Sets whether to print in color or in black and white Secure Settings Panel Lock Purpose To restrict access to Admin Menu and Report List with a password and to set or change the password K NOTE This menu sets a password to lock the operator panel When you change the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool click Set Password on the left frame and set the password Values Panel Lock Set Restricts access to Admin Menu and Report List witha password New Password Sets a password that is required to access Admin Menu and Report List Re enter Password Enter the new password again to confirm Software Download Purpose To set whether to enable download of software updates Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 87 Function Enabled Purpose To enable the
174. ethod Select the public key method of the self signed certificate Public Key Size Select the size of public key Issuer Sets the issuer of the self signed certificate Validity Enters the valid days from 1 to 9999 days Generate Certificate Click to generate the self signed certificate Certificate Signing Request CSR Click to display the Certificate Signing Request CSR page and to create a CSR from the page Digital Signature Algorithm Select the public key method Public Key Size Select the size of public key 2 Digit Country Code Enter your country code Required State Province Name ST Enter the name of state region where your organization is located Locality Name L Enter the name of the city where your organization is located Organization Name O Enter your legal organization name Required Organization Unit OU Enter your division name Required Common Name CN Enter the fully qualified domain name used for an SSL communication E mail Address Enter the e mail address to contact your organization Upload Signed Certificate Click to display the Upload Signed Certificate page and to upload the certificate file to the printer from the page Password Enter the password to upload the certificate file Re enter Password Enter the password again for confirmation File Name Click Browse to browse the file name to upload to the printer Import Click Import
175. f Discards the print job without printing an error report K NOTE Instructions from the PS driver override the settings specified on the operator panel PS Job Time Out Purpose To specify the runtime of one PostScript 3 Compatible job The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again Values Off Job time out does not occur On 1 minute A PostScript 3 Compatible error occurs if processing is not completed Available Range after the specified time 1 900 minutes Output Color Purpose To specify the color mode to color or black and white Values Color Prints in the color mode Works well with texts and photos Black White Prints in the black and white mode Works well with texts Image Depth Purpose To specify the image depth setting to 1 bit or 2 bit depth Values 1 Bit 2 Bit Understanding the Printer Menus 135 PDF Settings Use this menu to change printer settings that only affect the PDF jobs Quantity Purpose To specify the number of copies to print Values 1 The values are in increments of 1 Available Range 1 999 Print Mode Purpose To specify the print mode Values Normal For documents with normal sized characters High Quality For documents with small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot matrix printer PDF Password Purpose To specify the password to print a
176. f an incoming call is not a fax the printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call Ans Machine Fax The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine In this mode the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones If the phone communication is using serial transmission in your country such as Germany Sweden Denmark Austria Belgium Italy France and Switzerland this mode is not supported DRPD Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD option a distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company After the telephone company has provided a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring pattern Auto Rec Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call Auto Rec TEL FAX Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call Auto Rec Ans FAX Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming call Line Monitor Sets the volume of the line monitor which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made Ring Tone Volume Sets the volume of th
177. face down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 or Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 Press the gt Scan button Press the V button until Scan to Network Folder is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button to select the destination to store the scanned file in e You can also directly find the destination by its ID number on the Address Book Enter the ID using the numeric keypad and then press the Y Set button e To check the detailed information of the destination press the button K NOTE Only one destination can be specified at a time Ensure that the desired destination is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Configure the scan settings as necessary Settings such as file format and color mode are available To configure these settings press the W button until Preferences 1s highlighted and then press the Y Set button For details about setting items see Scan Defaults on page 121 Ensure that Start Scan is highlighted and then press the gt Start button Scanning to USB Memory The Scan to USB Memory feature allows you to scan documents and save the scanned data to a USB memory With this feature you can also scan both sides of ID card on one side of a page in its original size Basic Scanning Procedures 1 Insert a USB memory to the USB port of the prin
178. firm Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected server ID Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected server ID Server Address Confirm Change Create Purpose To view or edit the server address entries on the Server Address page or create a new entry The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm Change or Create on the Server Address top page Values ID Displays the selected server ID Name Allows you to view or change the server name assigned to the server ID or enter a new server name Server Type FTP Select this to store scanned documents on a server via the FTP protocol SMB Select this to store scanned documents on a computer via the Server Message Block SMB protocol Server Address Allows you to view or edit the server address registered under the server ID or enter a new server address Share Name Allows you to view or edit the assigned shared name or enter a new shared name when Server Type is set to SMB Server Path Allows you to view or edit the assigned server path or enter a new path Server Port Number Allows you to view or edit the assigned server port number or enter a new port number If you leave the text box blank the default port number FTP 21 SMB 139 will be used Login Name Allows you to view or edit the login name that is required to access the selected pro
179. g WPS PBC with the wiri Wi Fi WPS button confirm the position of the WPS button button name may vary on the wireless LAN access point Registrar or router For information about WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point Registrar or router refer to the manual supplied with the product K NOTE For more information on the wie Wi Fi WPS button see Status of Wi Fi WPS Button Backlight on page 72 1 2 If a problem occurs or error messages are displayed on the operator panel see Wireless Problems on page 306 Press and hold the Wi Fi WPS button on the operator panel until the LCD panel shows Press WPS Button on WPS Router Start the WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point Registrar or router within 2 minutes When the wireless LAN connection setting is completed the Wi Fi WPS button lights up WPS PBC Operator Panel Menu You can start WPS PBC Wi Fi Protected Setup Push Button Configuration from the operator panel K 7 EZ u O oO QQ N NOTE WPS PBC is available only when the wireless LAN access point Registrar or router supports WPS PBC NOTE Before starting WPS PBC confirm the position of the WPS button button name may vary on the wireless LAN access point Registrar or router For information about WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point Registrar or router refer to the manual supplied with the product NOTE A password is required to enter Admin Menu w
180. g destinations you can select TO or BCC as a destination type To enter the e mail address directly using the numeric keypad a Ensure that Enter Address is highlighted and then press the Y Set button b Enter the e mail address using the numeric keypad and then press the Y Set button K NOTE Only one destination can be specified at a time To specify multiple destinations use the Address Book K NOTE The destination type is automatically setto TO To select personal addresses from Address Book a Pressthe V button until Address Book is highlighted and then press the Y Set button OR Press the ina Contacts button Scanning b Press the V button to move the cursor to the desired destination You can also directly find the destination by its ID number on the Address Book Enter the number using the numeric keypad and then press the Y Set button To check the detailed information of the destination press the button c Press the gt button repeatedly to display TO or BCC as a destination type and then press the Y Set button To select group addresses from Address Book a Press the V button until E mail Group is highlighted and then press the Y Set button OR Press the ina Contacts button b Press the V button to move the cursor to the desired destination You can also directly find the destination by its ID number on the Address Book Enter the number using the numeric keypad and then press th
181. g the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters on page 73 Operator Panel 71 Status of Wi Fi WPS Button Backlight This section describes when the backlight of the Wi Fi WPS button lights up or blinks For more information see Wireless Problems on page 306 Wi Fi WPS button backlight Wi Fi Printer status settings Off N A Connecting to the network via Ethernet cable Wireless connection is not available when an Ethernet cable is connected to the printer Off On The printer enters Sleep Deep Sleep mode Failed to connect with wireless LAN access point or router Ga On On Wireless link established i Blinkin On Searching with wireless LAN access point or router ree ae a 8 g P y Blinking slowly On Connecting with wireless LAN access point or router l You can enable disable the Wi Fi settings For more information see Wi Fi on page 142 72 Operator Panel Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters As you perform various tasks you may need to enter names and numbers For example when you set up your printer you enter your name or your company name and telephone number When you store speed dial or group dial numbers you may also need to enter the corresponding names ai gt o cer pal e When entering a letter press the appropriate button until your desired letter appears on the display For example to enter the letter O press 6 Each time you press 6 the display shows the le
182. gs itoi 6 pe Printer Status Printer Events Printer Informati is Book Printer Status Egg retest 7 T cena Cyan Cartridge Level 98 rl 107 o E 11 Jy www del com supplies aT 12 A oae A A ee 13 oo a 20 so 1 Printer Status Links to the Printer Status menu 2 Printer Jobs Links to the Printer Jobs menu 3 Printer Settings Links to the Printer Settings Report menu 4 Print Server Settings Links to the Print Server Reports menu 5 Print Volume Links to the Print Volume menu 6 Address Book Links to the Address Book menu 7 Printer Information Links to the Printer Status menu 8 Tray Settings Links to the Tray Settings menu 9 E mail Alert Links to the Print Server Settings menu 10 Set Password Links to the Security menu 11 Online Help Links to the Dell Support website 12 Order Supplies at Links to the Dell web page 13 Contact Dell Support at Links to the Dell support page web address Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 79 Right Frame The right frame is located on the right side of all pages The contents of the right frame correspond to the menu that you select in the left frame For details on the items displayed in the right frame see Details of the Menu Items on page 81 Buttons in the Right Frame EE P 2 e reo mea Dell Color MFP E525w Sa IPv4 IPv6 Link Local Ad D AD E HEr IPv6 Statoless Addi z ELE WL IICA LA Ti
183. h WwW NY Press the E Menu button Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Enter the password and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Secure Settings is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Panel Lock is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Panel Lock Set is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Disable is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Resetting Defaults After executing this function and rebooting the printer the menu parameters or data are reset to their default values K NOTE A password is required to enter Admin Menu when Panel Lock Set is setto Enable In this case enter the u Oo FP WwW N password you specified and press the Y Set button Press the E Menu button Press the Y button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the YW button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the Y button until Maintenance is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the Y button until Initialize NVM is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the YW button until the desired setting is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the YY button until Yes is highlighted and then press the y
184. haracters can be entered Infrastructure Configures the wireless setting through the access point such as a wireless router No Security Configures the wireless settings without any security method from WEP and WPA2 PSK AES Mixed Mode PSK Configures the wireless settings with the mixed mode PSK encryption Mixed Mode PSK automatically selects the encryption type from WPA PSK AES or WPA2 PSK AES PassPhrase Specifies the passphrase of 8 to 63 Entry alphanumeric or 64 hexadecimal characters WPA2 PSK AES Configures the wireless setting with the WPA2 PSK AES encryption PassPhrase Specifies the passphrase of 8 to 63 Entry alphanumeric or 64 hexadecimal characters WEP WEP Key Entry Configures the wireless settings with the WEP encryption For 64 bit keys enter 10 hexadecimal characters For 128 bit keys enter 26 hexadecimal characters Transmit Key Specifies the transmit key from WEP Key 1 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 3 and WEP Key 4 Ad hoc Configures the wireless setting without the access point such as a wireless router No Security 138 Understanding the Printer Menus Configures the wireless settings without any security method from WEP WEP WEP Key Entry Configures the wireless settings with the WEP encryption For 64 bit keys enter 10 hexadecimal characters For 128 bit keys enter 26 hexadecimal characters Transmit Key Specifies the transmit key from
185. hat is not damp The task is complete Contact Dell Is the problem recovered Multi feed Jam Action Yes No 1 Ensure that paper is properly loaded in the standard 150 sheet tray The task is complete Go to action 2 Is the problem recovered 2 Isthe print media damp Go to action 3a Go to action 3b 3a Use print media that is not damp The task is complete Go to action 3b Is the problem recovered 3b Fan the print media The task is complete Contact Dell Is the problem recovered A document jam occurs in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF if scanning of multiple sheet document is canceled while scanning is in progress Action Yes 1 Clear the jam See Clearing Paper Jams From the ADF on page 278 Is the problem recovered The task is complete Contact Dell Troubleshooting 301 Copy Problem Problem Action A document loaded in the ADF cannot be copied Ensure that the ADF cover is firmly closed Vertical lines appear on the outputs when you copy using the ADE Clean the ADF glass See Cleaning the Scanner on page 272 Fax Problems Problem Action The printer is not working there is no display and the buttons are not working Unplug the power cord and plug it in again Ensure that there is power to the electrical receptacle No dial tone sounds Check that the phone line is connected properly See Connecting the Telephone L
186. he lt e Fax button 2 Specify a fax number For details see Sending a Fax Automatically on page 226 and Automatic Dialing on page 235 Press the V button until Preferences is highlighted and then press the V Set button Press the V button until Lighter Darker is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 5 Press the gt or lt button to select the desired setting and then press the Y Set button K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Lighter2 Makes the fax lighter than the original Works well with dark print Lighterl Normal Works well with standard typed or printed documents Darkerl Makes the fax darker than the original Works well with light print or faint pencil markings Darker2 Confirming Transmissions When the last page of your document has been sent successfully the printer beeps and returns to the standby mode If something goes wrong while sending your fax an error message appears on the display If you receive an error message press the Y Set button to clear the message and try to send the document again You can set your printer to print a confirmation report automatically after each fax transmission For more information see Printing a Report on page 241 Automatic Redialing If the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax the printer will automatically redial the number every minute based on the number set
187. he Y Set button Press the V button to select Sleep or Deep Sleep and then press the Y Set button Press the W or A button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad and then press the Y Set button You can select from 5 30 minutes for Sleep or 1 6 minutes for Deep Sleep To return to the previous screen press the Back button Operator Panel Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Overview K NOTE This web tool is available only when the printer is connected to a network One of the features of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is the E mail Alert setup which sends an e mail to you or the key operator when the printer needs supplies or intervention lt LES Eo E Dell Color MFP E525w r Pra 7 Pv6 Link Local Address A Pv6 Stateless Address 1 Tain 7h Jet LHe Location Printer Status Came eran Printer Jobs Engish v Printer Settings Print Server Settings P Printer Status Printer Events Printer Information Print Volume Address Book Printer Status gg Retesh Printer Information Tray Settings Cyan Cartridge Level 98 E Mail Alert Magenta Cartridge Level 99 Set Password ES Yellow Cartridge Level 96 Order Supplies at Black Cartridge Level 97 www cellcomisuppics Contact Dell Support at supa ee Paper Trays Status Capacity Size Multipurpose Feeder No Cassette 150 sheets A4 210x 297 mm
188. he desired connection method from the SMTP SSL TLS Communication drop down list and then click Apply New Settings Settings have been changed Restart printer for new settings to take effect is displayed Click Restart Printer Using Digital Certificates 247 Understanding Printer Messages The printer operator panel displays messages describing the current state of the printer and indicates possible printer problems you must resolve This chapter describes messages their meanings and how to clear the messages AN CAUTION When a status code is displayed the print data remaining on the printer and the information accumulated in the memory of the printer are not secured Status code What you can do 001 360 Turn off the printer and then on If this does not solve the problem contact Dell See Contacting Dell on 003 340 page 310 003 356 005 121 Remove the jammed paper and close the ADF cover See Clearing Paper Jams From the ADF on page 278 005 301 Close the ADF cover 006 370 Turn off the printer and then on If this does not solve the problem contact Dell See Contacting Dell on 007 371 Page3l0 009 360 Re install the specified toner cartridge See Installing a Toner Cartridge on page 264 009 361 009 362 009 363 009 654 Turn off the printer and then on If this does not solve the problem contact Dell See Contacting Dell on 010 354 Page 310 010 377 016 315 016 317 016 33
189. he numeric keypad and then press the Y Set button You can also use speed dial or group dial numbers to specify the fax number For more information see Automatic Dialing on page 235 K NOTE To call up the fax number the printer dialed last press the Y Redial Pause button and then press the Y Set button Configure the fax settings as necessary Settings such as resolution and contrast are available To configure these settings press the V button until Preferences is highlighted and then press the Y Set button For details about setting items see Setting Fax Options on page 227 Ensure that Start Fax is highlighted and then press the gt Start button When you are using the document glass the display prompts you for another page Press the WV button to select Yes to add more documents or to select No to send the fax immediately and then press the Y Set button K NOTE Press the X Cancel button to cancel the fax job while sending the fax Sending a Fax Manually 1 226 Load the document s face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document s in first OR Place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 or Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 Press the e Fax button Press the V button until OnHook is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the
190. he settings of the LDAP user mapping Values Common Name Sets the attribute type of the common name set for the LDAP server Surname Sets the attribute type of the surname set for the LDAP server Given Name Sets the attribute type of the given name set for the LDAP server E mail Address Sets the attribute type of the e mail address set for the LDAP server Fax Phone Sets the attribute type of the fax phone number set for the LDAP server 108 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool SSL TLS Purpose To specify the settings for the SSL encryption communication to the printer and set delete the certificate used for the communication between the printer and other devices such as an LDAP server Values SSL TLS Server Communication Select the check box to enable the SSL TLS communication for when client computers access the printer to view or change its settings through the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool or to print files through AirPrint LDAP SSL TLS Select the check box to enable the SSL TLS communication between the printer and an LDAP Communication server SMTP SSL TLS Sets the type of SSL TLS used to communicate with the SMTP server Communication Create New Certificate Click to display the Generate Certificate page and to create a security certification from the page This button is available only when the self signed certificate is not generated Public Key M
191. he software program the printer driver or the printer utilities have precedence over the settings made on the operator panel Change the menu settings from the printer driver the printer utilities or the software program instead of the operator panel Printing Problems K NOTE A password is required to enter Admin Menu when Panel Lock Set is setto Enable In this case enter the password you specified and press the Y Set button Problem Action Job did not print or incorrect characters printed Ensure that Ready to Copy appears on the operator panel before you send a job to print Ensure that print media is loaded in the printer Verify that you are using the correct printer driver Ensure that you are using the correct Ethernet or USB cable and that it is securely connected to the printer Verify that the correct print media size is selected If you are using a print spooler verify that the spooler has not stalled Check the interface of your printer from the Admin Menu Determine the host interface you are using Print a panel settings page to verify that the current interface settings are correct Refer to Printing a Report List Using the Operator Panel on page 129 for details on how to print a panel settings page Troubleshooting 289 Problem Action Print media misfeeds or multiple feeds occur Ensure that the print media you are using meets the specification
192. hen Panel Lock Set is setto Enable In this case enter the password you specified and press the Set button Press the E Menu button Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Network is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until WPS Setup is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Push Button Configuration is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Yes is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Press WPS Button on WPS Router is displayed and start the WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point Registrar or router within 2 minutes When the wireless LAN connection setting is completed the Wi Fi WPS button lights up Connecting Your Printer 31 WPS PIN The PIN code of WPS PIN can only be configured from the operator panel K NOTE WPS PIN is available only when the wireless LAN access point Registrar or router supports WPS PIN K NOTE A password is required to enter Admin Menu when Panel Lock Set is setto Enable In this case enter the password you specified and press the y Set button 1 Press the El Menu button 2 Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 3 Press the V button until Admin Menu i
193. hen a fax is received in the secure receiving mode your printer stores it into memory and the Job Status screen displays Secure Receive to let you know that there is a fax stored K NOTE If you change the password while Secure Receive Set is Enable perform steps 1 to 5 Press the V button until Change Password is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Enter the new password and then press the Y Set button Faxing 239 To print received documents 1 Press the El Menu button 2 Press the V button until Job Status is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 3 Press the V button until Secure Receive is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 4 Enter the password and then press the Y Set button The faxes stored in memory are printed To turn the secure receiving mode off 1 Access the Secure Receive Set menu by repeating steps to 6 in To turn the secure receiving mode on 2 Pressthe V button until Disable is highlighted and then press the V Set button 3 To return to the previous screen press the 9 Back button Using an Answering Machine ANV To the wall Printer Line Telephone answering device Phone jack You can connect a telephone answering device TAD directly to the back of your printer as shown above Set your printer to the Ans Machine Fax mode and set Auto Rec Ans FAX to specify the time for the TAD When the TAD picks up the call
194. ia Wi Fi Direct may differ from the channel used by the printer to connect to a network via Wi Fi infrastructure mode In such a case simultaneous connection with Wi Fi Direct and Wi Fi infrastructure mode may not work properly NOTE The printer connected with Wi Fi Direct supports the following protocols LPD Port9100 Web Services on Devices WSD print Bonjour mDNS SNMPv1 v2c v3 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool NOTE Wi Fi Direct network does not support IPv6 Setting Up Wi Fi Direct To use Wi Fi Direct you need to first set up the Wi Fi Direct settings from the operator panel of the printer To connect the mobile device to the printer via Wi Fi Direct you need to operate the mobile device to establish connection Setting Up the Printer 1 nn 0 1 FP WwW NY Press the E Menu button Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the Y button until Network is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the Y button until Wi Fi Direct Setup is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Wi Fi Direct is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Select Enable and then press the Y Set button When you use a Wi Fi Direct certified device including device with the Wi Fi Direct PIN function proceed to step 11 When you use a device that is no
195. icated on the print media package Z NOTE After loading paper in the standard 150 sheet tray specify the same paper type and paper size on the operator panel Capacity Standard 150 sheet tray can hold e 150 sheets of standard paper e 16 2 mm 0 64 inches of thick paper e One sheet of coated paper e 16 2 mm 0 64 inches of post cards e Five envelopes e 16 2 mm 0 64 inches of labels Print Media Dimensions Standard 150 sheet tray accept print media within the following dimensions e Width 76 2 mm 3 00 inches to 215 9 mm 8 50 inches e Length 127 0 mm 5 00 inches to 355 6 mm 14 00 inches Loading Print Media in the Standard 150 Sheet Tray K NOTE To avoid paper jams do not remove the standard 150 sheet tray while printing K NOTE Use only laser print media Do not use ink jet paper in this printer 1 Hold the tray with both hands and remove it from the printer 168 Loading Print Media 2 Open the dust cover and adjust the paper guides 4 Load the print media into the tray with the recommended print side facing up Y NOTE Do not exceed the maximum fill line in the tray Overfilling the tray may cause paper jams K NOTE When loading coated paper load one sheet at a time Loading Print Media 169 5 Align the width guides and length guide against the edges of the print media 6 After confirming that the guides are adjusted and secured close the dust cover and insert the tray into the pri
196. ice is successfully disconnected Resetting the Passphrase 1 0 Nuy 0O Cl Eh WwW N Press the El Menu button Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Network is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the Y button until Wi Fi Direct Setup is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Connection Status is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Select the device name to reset the passphrase Select Reset Passphrase and Start and then press the Y Set button Wi Fi Direct is disconnected and the passphrase is reset You can also reset the passphrase by the following steps u Oo FP WwW N Press the El Menu button Press the Y button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the Y button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the Y button until Network is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the Y button until Wi Fi Direct Setup is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the Y button until PassPhrase is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Select Reset Passphrase and Start and then press the Y Set button Wi Fi Direct is disconnected and the passphrase is reset Resetting the PIN Code 1 u O Of Eh q N 184
197. ices on Devices WSD This section provides information for network printing with Web Services on Devices WSD the protocol of Microsoft for Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2012 and Windows Server 2012 R2 Adding Roles of Print Services When you use Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2012 or Windows Server 2012 R2 you need to add the roles of print services to the Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2012 or Windows Server 2012 R2 client Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows 55 For Windows Server 2008 R2 1 2 3 6 Click Start gt Administrative Tools gt Server Manager Select Add Roles from the Action menu Select the Print and Document Services check box on the Server Roles window in the Add Roles Wizard and then click Next Click Next Select the Print Server check box and then click Next Click Install For Windows Server 2008 1 2 3 4 5 Click Start gt Administrative Tools gt Server Manager Select Add Roles from the Action menu Select the Print Services check box on the Server Roles window in the Add Roles Wizard and then click Next Select the Print Server check box and then click Next Click Install For Windows Server 2012 or Windows Server 2012 R2 1 2 3 Click Server Manager of the Start scree
198. ick Start gt Devices and Printers Right click the printer icon and select Printer properties On the Sharing tab click Change Sharing Options if exists Select the Share this printer check box and then enter a name in the Share name text box Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients using this printer Click Apply and then click OK For Windows 8 Windows 8 64 bit Edition Windows 8 1 Windows 8 1 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2012 or Windows Server 2012 R2 1 ao a Ff WwW N 58 Right click the bottom left corner of the screen and then click Control Panel Hardware and Sound Hardware for Windows Server 2012 and Windows Server 2012 R2 gt Devices and Printers Right click the printer icon and select Printer properties On the Sharing tab click Change Sharing Options if exists Select the Share this printer check box and then enter a name in the Share name text box Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients using this printer Click Apply and then click OK Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows Checking the Shared Printer To check that the printer is shared e Ensure that the printer object in the Printers Printers and Faxes or Devices and Printers folder is shared The share icon 3 is shown under the printer icon e From a network client browse Network or My Network Places Find the host name of th
199. id burns do not clear paper jams immediately after printing The fusing unit becomes extremely hot during use K NOTE To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel you must clear all print media from the print media path 1 Open the ADF cover 2 Remove the jammed document by carefully pulling it in the direction of the arrow shown in the following illustration 278 Clearing Jams 3 If you find it difficult to pull the document open the document feeder tray Clearing Jams 279 6 Close the ADF cover and then load the documents back into the ADE K NOTE Ensure that you adjust the document guides before printing a legal size document 7 Ifyou cannot remove the jammed document from the document output tray or cannot find any jammed document there open the document output tray 280 Clearing Jams 8 Remove the document from the ADF feed roller or the feed area by carefully pulling the document in the direction of the arrow shown in the following illustration Clearing Jams 281 Clearing Paper Jams From the Front of the Printer AN WARNING Before performing any of the following procedures read and follow the safety instructions in the mportant Information K NOTE To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel you must clear all print media from the print media path 1 Lift up the cover above the standard 150 sheet tray and remove any paper jammed from the front of the printer 2
200. if the remote machine also supports the super fine resolution Ultra Fine Suitable for documents containing photographic images Lighter Darker Sets the default density level to be used for fax transmission Delayed Start Sets the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a specified time Fax Settings Purpose To configure the basic fax settings K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Values Receive Mode Telephone Automatic fax reception is turned off You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external telephone and then pressing the remote receive code Fax Automatically receives faxes Telephone Fax When the printer receives an incoming fax the external telephone rings for the time specified in Auto Receive Tel Fax and then the printer automatically receives a fax If an incoming call is not a fax the printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call Answer The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine In this mode Machine the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones Fax If the phone communication is using serial transmission in your country such as Germany Sweden Denmark Austria Belgium Italy France and Switzerland this mode is not supported DRPD Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD option a distinctive
201. ight the desired transmit key from WEP Key 1 toWEP Key 4 and then press the Y Set button Proceed to step 11 eal tu Select the encryption type from No Security or Wi If you do not set security for your wireless network Ensure that No Security is highlighted and then press the Y Set button To use WEP encryption a Press the V button until WEP is highlighted and then press the Y Set button b Enter the WEP key and then press the Y Set button c Press the V button to highlight the desired transmit key from WEP Key 1toWEP Key 4 and then press the Y Set button When the wireless LAN connection setting is completed the Wi Fi WPS button lights up Connecting Your Printer 33 Reconfiguring the Wireless Setting To change the wireless setting through an Ethernet or wireless connection from your computer perform the following K NOTE To change the wireless setting through wireless connection ensure that the wireless connection setting is completed in Wireless Connection on page 30 K NOTE The following settings are available when the network mode is set to infrastructure in Wireless Connection on page 30 1 Check the IP address of the printer For details about how to check the IP address of the printer see Verifying the IP Address on page 45 2 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser Go 2 Sr
202. il PassPhrase is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Enter the passphrase The printer is ready to use the Wi Fi Direct connection K NOTE To confirm the SSID and passphrase you can print the list by selecting Print Passphrase onthe PassPhrase screen Connecting the Mobile Device 1 182 Connect the mobile device to the Wi Fi Direct network For Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Windows RT and Windows RT 8 1 a Tap Settings in the PC settings menu b Tap the Wi Fi icon c Tap the printer SSID and then tap Connect d Enter the passphrase and then tap Next The mobile device will connect to the printer For Windows 7 a Click on the network icon on the taskbar b Click the printer SSID and then click Connect c Enter the passphrase and then click OK d Click Cancel to exit the Set Network Location window The mobile device will connect to the printer Printing For Windows Vista a Click Start gt Connect To b Click the printer SSID c Enter the passphrase and then click Connect The mobile device will connect to the printer For iOS a Tap Settings gt Wi Fi b Tap the printer SSID c Enter the passphrase and then tap Join The mobile device will connect to the printer For Android The procedure varies depending on your mobile device you are using Refer to the manual provided with your mobile device Install the printer on the mobile device For Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Windows
203. imits under mobile exposure conditions antennas are greater than 20cm from a person s body This device has been certified for use in Canada Status of the listing in the Industry Canada s REL Radio Equipment List can be found at the following web address http www ic gc ca app sitt reltel srch nwRdSrch do lang eng Additional Canadian information on RF exposure also can be found at the following web address http www ic gc ca eic site smt gst nsf eng st08792 html Canada avis d Industry Canada 1C Cet appareil num rique de classe B est conforme aux normes canadiennes ICES 003 et RSS 210 Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes 1 cet appareil ne doit pas causer d interf rence et 2 cet appareil doit accepter toute interf rence notamment les interf rences qui peuvent affecter son fonctionnement Informations concernant l exposition aux fr quences radio RF La puissance de sortie mise par l appareil de sans fil Dell est inf rieure a la limite d exposition aux fr quences radio d Industry Canada IC Utilisez l appareil de sans fil Dell de fa on minimiser les contacts humains lors du fonctionnement normal Ce p riph rique a galement t valu et d montr conforme aux limites d exposition aux RF d IC dans des conditions d exposition a des appareils mobiles les antennes se situent 4 moins de 20 cm du corps d une personne Ce p riph rique est homologu pour l utilisation au Canada
204. ine on page 35 Check that the phone socket in the wall is working by plugging in another phone Faxes are not sent correctly to the numbers stored in the memory Print an Address Book list and ensure that the numbers are stored in the memory correctly The document does not feed into the printer Ensure that the document is not wrinkled and you are putting it in correctly Check that the document is of the right size not too thick or thin Ensure that the ADF cover is firmly closed Faxes are not received automatically The Fax Telephone Fax Ans Machine Fax or DRPD mode should be selected Ensure that there is paper in the standard 150 sheet tray Check to see if the display shows Memory Full Check the Junk Fax Setup setting The printer does not send faxes Sending should show up on the display Check the other fax machine you are sending to to see if it can receive your fax The incoming fax has blank spaces or is received in poor quality The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty A noisy phone line can cause line errors Check your printer by making a copy The toner cartridge may be empty Replace the toner cartridge For details see Replacing Toner Cartridges on page 262 Some of the words on an incoming fax are stretched The fax machine sending you the fax had a temporary document jam Vertical lines appear on the documents when
205. ing 217 6 Entera name and e mail address in the N 7 P Sr mr Oo E ame and E mail Address fields cia Printer Status Printer Jobs Printer Settings Print Server Settings Print Volume Address Book Printer Information Tray Settings Dell Color MFP E525w VA EA IPvG Link Local Address 147 IPvE Stateless Address 1 580 391 BIIEN Mid Location Contact Person Engish v FaxE Mail Server Address Address Book FAX Group E Mail Gi roup E Mail Default Setup Address Book ID Fax Speed Dial Name 001 New Registration Phone Number E Mail Alert E Mail Addross gt Set Password Online Help Apply New Settings Restore Settings Back Order Supplies at www dell com supplies Contact Dell Support at Pre Click Apply New Settings Sending an E mail With the Scanned File 1 218 Load the document s face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document s in first OR Place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 or Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 Press the gt Scan button Press the V button until Scan to E mail is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Specify an e mail address using the numeric keypad or the Address Book When specifyin
206. ing Setting in the General or Paper Output tab of the print driver V NOTE If a document name is not assigned to your print job in the printer driver the job name will be identified using the time and date of submission to distinguish it from other jobs you have stored under your name Printing the Stored Jobs 1 Press the E Menu button 2 Press the Y button until Job Status is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 3 Press the V button until Print Menu is highlighted and then press the vA Set button Select Secure Print and then press the Y Set button 4 Press the Y button until the user name that you specified in the print driver is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 5 Enter the password that you specified in the print driver using the numeric keypad and then press the vA Set button peers A The password appears as a series of asterisks to ensure confidentiality The list of stored documents appears K NOTE When you enter an invalid password the message Wrong Password appears Press the Y Set button or 5 Back button to return to the screen for entering the password 6 Press the Y button until the document that you want to print is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Printing 179 7 Press the Y button until Print is highlighted and then press the V Set button K NOTE When you delete the document in the memory press the W button until Delete is highlighted and then pre
207. ing the operator panel 1 Press the E Menu button Press the Y button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the Y button until Network is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Protocol is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the Y button until Google Cloud Print is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Select Enable oo JO Cl Eh WwW N Turn off the printer and turn it on again to apply the settings 186 Printing When using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 1 2 3 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering IP address of the printer in your web browser For more information see Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool on page 75 and Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool on page 76 In the navigation panel on the left click Print Server Settings tab Click Port Settings and select On check box in Google Cloud Print under Port Status Registering the Printer to Your Google Account To register the printer to your Google account follow the procedure below 1 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering IP address of the printer in your web browser For more information see Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool on page 75 and Starting the Dell Printer Configuration We
208. inter K NOTE The Auto Refresh feature is effective for the contents of the top frame Printer Status page Job List page and Completed Jobs page Values System Settings Printer Name Specifies the name of the printer using up to 31 alphanumeric characters Location Specifies the location of the printer using up to 63 alphanumeric characters Contact Person Specifies the contact name number and other information of the administrator and service center using up to 63 alphanumeric characters Administrator E mail Specifies the contact address of the administrator and service Address center using up to 64 alphanumeric characters Asset Tag Number Enter the asset tag number for the printer EWS Settings Auto Refresh Automatically refreshes the contents of the status display pages Auto Refresh Interval Sets the time interval for refreshing the contents of the status display pages automatically from 15 to 600 seconds Web Page Title Specifies a web page title shown on the title bar of a web browser You can select either Internet Services or Printer Model IP Address as the title that users can see when they access the printer via Printer Configuration Web Tool Port Settings Purpose To enable or disable printing connectors and management protocol features K NOTE The settings in the Port Settings page will be valid only when the printer is rebooted When you change or configure the settings click App
209. inter Software 243 Using Digital Certificates The authentication feature using digital certificates upgrades security when sending print data or setting data To use digital certificates set the digital certificate on the printer and then enable various SSL TLS communication K NOTE For information about the digital certificate error see Understanding Printer Messages on page 248 and Digital Certificate Problems on page 305 Setting a Digital Certificate The following is a typical setup flow for setting digital certificates Prepare the printer for HTTPS Communication using a self signed certificate For details see Preparing to Use HTTPS Communication on page 244 Export a Certificate Signing Request CSR from the printer For details see Exporting a Certificate Signing Request CSR on page 245 y Receive a signed certificate from a certificate authority using the Certificate Signing Request CSR exported from the printer y Upload the signed certificate to the printer For details see Uploading a Signed Certificate on page 245 Preparing to Use HTTPS Communication Before managing digital certificates set HTTPS communication with a self signed certificate 1 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser For more information see Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool on page 75 2 Click Print Server Setting
210. inters gt Add a printer Click The printer that I want isn t listed Select Add a local printer or network printer with manual settings and then click Next Select the port connected to your printer and then click Next Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box Click Browse and then select the extracted folder in step 1 Click OK Select your printer name and click Next Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows 51 11 To change the printer name enter the printer name in the Printer name text box and then click Next Installation starts 12 Ifyou do not share your printer select Do not share this printer If you share your printer select Share this printer so that others on your network can find and use it Click Next 13 As the driver installation is completed click Print a test page to verify installation To use this printer as the default printer select the Set as the default printer check box 14 Click Finish Network Connection Setup Installing PCL PS and Fax Printer Drivers 1 Insert the Software and Documentation disc into your computer to start Dell Printer Easy Install Click Main Menu Click Connect 2 3 4 Select Wireless or Ethernet Connection and then click Next 5 Select the printer you want to install from the printer list and then click Next If the target printer is not displayed on the list click the 8 Refresh button or click add printer to add a prin
211. ion and description of the printer for further information 6 Select Dell from the Make menu and click Continue 62 Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers CUPS 7 Select your printer name from the Model menu and click Add Printer The setup is complete Printing From the Applications When you have finished setting up the queue you can print jobs from the applications Start the print job from the application and specify the queue in the print dialog box However sometimes you can print only from the default queue depending on the application for example Mozilla In these cases before you start printing set queue you want to print to as the default queue For information on specifying the default queue see Setting the Default Queue Setting the Default Queue 1 Select Applications gt System Tools gt Terminal 2 Enter the following command in the terminal window su Enter the administrator password lpadmin d Enter the queue name Specifying the Printing Options You can specify the printing options such as color mode Open the URL http localhost 631 using a web browser Click Administration Click Manage Printers Click the queue name for which you want to specify the printing options Select Set Default Options from the Administration menu ao oo FF U N Click the desired setting item specify the required settings and click Set Default Options The message Printer xxx default opti
212. ional Kensington lock Connect the Kensington lock to the security slot on your printer Security slot For details see the documentation that shipped with the Kensington lock Ordering Supplies You can order consumables from Dell online when using a networked printer Enter the IP address of your printer in your web browser launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool and click the Order Supplies at to order toner for your printer 26 Aboutthe Printer Printer Setup 5 CONNECTING Your Printe asante 28 6 Setting Up Your Printer exi ir 38 7 Setting the IP Address 43 A a A AO 46 9 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows Connecting Your Printer Your Dell Color Multifunction Printer E525w interconnection cable must meet the following requirements Connection type Connection specifications Wireless IEEE 802 11b g n USB USB 2 0 compatible Ethernet 10 Base T 100 Base TX compatible Wall jack connector RJ11 Phone connector RJ11 1 Ethernet Port 2 USB Port 3 Wall Jack Connector LINE 4 Phone Connector PHONE 28 Connecting Your Printer Connecting Printer to Computer or Network USB Connection To connect the printer to a computer 1 Ensure that the printer computer and any other connected devices are turned off and unplugged from the power source outlet 2 Connect the smaller USB connector into the USB port at the back of the p
213. ir default values Values Reset Defaults User Fax Click Start to initialize the system parameters Section and Restart Printer Reset Defaults User Scan Click Start to initialize the fax number entries in the Address Book Section and Restart Printer Reset Defaults System Click Start to initialize the e mail and server address entries in the Address Book Section and Restart Printer Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 95 Non Dell Toner Purpose To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer K NOTE Using non Dell brand toner cartridges may make some printer features unusable reduce print quality and decrease the reliability of your printer Dell recommends only new Dell brand toner cartridges for your printer Dell does not provide warranty coverage for problems caused by using accessories parts or components not supplied by Dell K NOTE Before you use toner cartridge of another manufacturer be sure to restart the printer Clock Settings Purpose To set the date and time and regional time zone of the printer K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Values Date Format yy mm dd Specifies the date format mm dd yy dd mm yy Time Format 12 Hour Clock Specifies the time format 24 Hour Clock Time Zone Specifies the time zone Set Date Specifies the current date Set Time Specifies the current time 1 The default varies depending
214. is complete Execute printing from the application Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator You must set the password for authority as the printer administrator to do operations 1 Select Computer gt More Applications and select GNOME Terminal on the Application Browser 2 Enter the following command in the terminal window su Enter the administrator password lppasswd g sys a root Enter the password for authority as the printer administrator after the Enter password prompt Re enter the password for authority as the printer administrator after the Enter password again prompt Uninstalling the Printer Driver 1 Select Computer gt More Applications and select GNOME Terminal on the Application Browser 2 Enter the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue su Enter the administrator password usr sbin lpadmin x Enter the printer queue name 3 Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model 4 Enter the following command in the terminal window su Enter the administrator password rpm e Dell Color MFP E525w The printer driver is uninstalled 66 Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers CUPS Operation on Ubuntu 12 04 LTS Setup Overview 1 2 3 4 Install the printer driver Set up the print queue Specify the default queue Specify the printing options Installing the Printer Driver 1 2 Select Applications g
215. ished setting up the queue you can print jobs from the applications Start the print job from the application and specify the queue in the print dialog box However sometimes you can print only from the default queue depending on the application for example Mozilla In these cases before you start printing set queue you want to print to as the default queue For information on specifying the default queue see Setting the Default Queue Setting the Default Queue 1 Select Applications gt System Tools gt Terminal 2 Enter the following command in the terminal window sudo lpadmin d Enter the queue name Enter the administrator password Specifying the Printing Options You can specify the printing options such as color mode Open the URL http localhost 631 using a web browser Click Administration Click Manage Printers Click the queue name for which you want to specify the printing options Select Set Default Options from the Administration menu ao a hy N Click the desired setting item specify the required settings and click Set Default Options The message Printer xxx default options have been set successfully appears The setting is complete Uninstalling the Printer Driver 1 Select Applications gt System Tools gt Terminal 2 Enter the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue sudo usr sbin lpadmin x Enter the print queue name Enter the administrator p
216. its a tone at the specified volume when a problem occurs Medium High Understanding the Printer Menus 151 Out of Paper Off Does not emit a tone when the printer runs out of paper Low Emits a tone at the specified volume when the printer runs out of paper Medium High All Tones Off Disables all the alert tones Low Sets the volume of all the alert tones at once Medium High mm inch Purpose To specify the measurement unit displayed after the numeric value on the operator panel Values Millimeters mm Specifies the default measurement unit Inches K NOTE The default varies depending on country specific factory default Auto Log Print Purpose To automatically print a job history report after every 20 jobs Values Off Does not automatically print a job history report On Automatically prints a job history report K NOTE The job history report can also be printed using the Report List menu Low Toner Alert Msg Purpose To specify whether to show the alert message when the toner is low Values Off Does not show the alert message when the toner is low On Shows the alert message when the toner is low 152 Understanding the Printer Menus RAM Disk Purpose To allocate memory to the RAM disk file system for the Secure Print feature The change takes effect after the printer is turned off and then on Values Off Does not allocate
217. ked with a password 8 Click Start Sending For Macintosh Y NOTE The names of the windows and the buttons may be different from those given in the following procedure depending on the application you are using Y NOTE To use this feature you must install the fax driver Faxing 231 1 Open the file you want to send by fax 2 Open the print dialog box from the application and then select Dell Color MFP E525w Fax Printer gt Dell Color MFP ES25w Fax A Presets Default Settings sa Copies fi Pages All From 1 to 1 Paper Size A4 210 by 297 mm Orientation Ts TextEdit UU _ Print header and footer M Rewrap contents to fit page cancel irene 3 Specify the fax settings K NOTE The settings done here are only applied to a single fax job 4 Click Print The Set Check Fax Transmission dialog box appears 5 Specify the destination for the recipient in one of the following ways e Enter a name and phone number directly e Select a recipient from the Phone Book saved on your computer OOQ Set Check Fax Transmission Recipient List Name Name Phone Number Phone Number Edit My Address Book file Default dma Look Up Address Book Delete Add to Address Book Authorization Delayed Send _ Delayed Send Password o Time 2012 06 13 21 09 Y NOTE Enter the password in the Password field in the Authorization area before sending a fax if the Fax service is locked
218. l Language is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 4 Press the Y button until the desired language is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Tool Box 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Dell Printers gt Dell Printer Hub Dell Printer Hub opens 2 Select Dell Color MFP E525w print driver at My Printers 3 Click on the link Tool Box from list at the left side of the page The Tool Box opens Click the System Settings tab Select Printer Information and Settings from the list at the left side of the page The System Settings page is displayed 6 Click System Settings 7 Select the desired language from Panel Language and then click Apply New Settings Setting the Power Saver Timer Option K NOTE A password is required to enter Admin Menu when Panel Lock Set issetto Enable In this case enter the password you specified and press the Y Set button You can set the timer to save the power consumption of the printer The printer waits before it restores the default copy settings if you do not start copying after changing them on the operator panel u O oO YN 74 Press the El Menu button Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the W button until System Settings is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Power Saver Timer is highlighted and then press t
219. l be canceled 034 750 Press the Set button to clear the message Check if the phone line is connected properly See Connecting the Telephone Line on page 35 034 751 Check if the destination machine blocks your fax as the junk fax If it does ask the receiver to disable the setting 034 752 Press the Set button to clear the message Check if the phone line is connected properly See 034753 Connecting the Telephone Line on page 35 034 754 Press the Y Set button to clear the message Lower Modem Speed 034 755 034 756 034 757 034 758 Press the Set button to clear the message Check if the phone line is connected properly See Connecting the Telephone Line on page 35 Or lower Modem Speed 034 759 Press the Y Set button to clear the message Lower Modem Speed 034 760 034 761 Press the Set button to clear the message Check if the phone line is connected properly See Connecting the Telephone Line on page 35 034 762 Press the Y Set button to clear the message Try the following e LowerModem Speed e Enable ECM 252 Understanding Printer Messages Status code What you can do 034 763 Press the Y Set button to clear the message Lower Modem Speed 034 764 034 765 034 766 034 767 Press the Set button to clear the message Check if the phone line is connected properly See Connecting the Telephone Line on page 35 034 768 Press the Y Set b
220. l number It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange PABX Discard Size Sets whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper Selecting Auto Reduction automatically reduces the fax page to fit it onto the output paper and does not discard any images or text at the bottom of the page ECM Sets whether to enable the ECM To use the ECM the remote machines must also support the ECM Modem Speed Specifies the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs Fax Activity Sets whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications Fax Transmit Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs Fax Broadcast Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations or only when an error occurs Protocol Monitor Sets whether to print a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs Country Sets the country where the printer is used Prefix Dial K NOTE Prefix Dial only supports the environment where you send a fax to the external line number To use Prefix Dial you must do the following from the operator panel u O 0901 A OO N Press the E Menu button Press the W button until System is highlighted and then pr
221. lass on page 189 Press the lt S Copy button Press the 6 Color Mode button to select the desired color mode NOTE If the Function Enabled setting for COPY is setto On Color Password you need to enter the four digit password to use the copy function If the Function Enabled setting for COPY is set to Of f the copy function is disabled For details see Function Enabled on page 158 Collated To so rt the copy output For example if you make two copies of three page document one complete three page document will print followed by the second complete document EZ oF Ww N 192 NOTE Copying documents with a large amount of data may exhaust available memory If a memory shortage occurs cancel the collating by turning Col lated to Uncollated on the operator panel 3 p 3 sj Load the document s face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document s in first OR Place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 or Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 Press the 3 Copy button Press the V button until Preferences is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Collated is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button to select the desired setting and then press the Y Set
222. le Luanda TC 01 00 Tunis TC 01 00 Windhoek UTC 02 00 Harare Johannesburg Kinshasa Tripoli 3 a a TC 02 00 Cairo a TC 03 00 Addis Ababa Khartoum Mogadishu Nairobi 38 Setting Up Your Printer Geographic Region Time Zone Americas TC 10 00 Adak TC 09 00 Alaska TC 08 00 Pacific Time US amp Canada TC 08 00 Tijuana l l l l l TC 07 00 Arizona Dawson Creek Sonora TC 07 00 Chihuahua Mazatlan TC 07 00 Mountain Time US amp Canada TC 06 00 Cancun Mexico City Monterrey TC 06 00 Central America TC 06 00 Central Time US amp Canada TC 06 00 Saskatchewan paa TC 05 00 Atikokan Resolute paa TC 05 00 Bogota Lima Panama Quito TC 05 00 Cayman Islands Jamaica Port au Prince TC 05 00 Eastern Time US amp Canada TC 05 00 Grand Turk TC 04 30 Caracas TC 04 00 Asuncion TC 04 00 Atlantic Time Canada TC 04 00 Blanc Sablon TC 04 00 Caribbean Islands TC 04 00 Cuiaba TC 04 00 Georgetown La Paz Manaus TC 04 00 Thule TC 03 30 St John s TC 03 00 Brasilia Cayenne Paramaribo TC 03 00 Buenos Aires TC 03 00 Greenland TC 03 00 Miquelon TC 03 00 Montevideo TC 02 00 Noronha
223. lel to the short edge of the paper Landscape Prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the paper Understanding the Printer Menus 131 Font Purpose To specify the default font from the fonts list installed in the printer Values Courier AlbertusMd ITCBookmanDb CGTimes AlbertusXb ITCBookmanLtlt CGTimesBd Arial TTCBookmanDblt CGTimeslt ArialBd NwCentSchlbkRmn CGTimesBdIt Ariallt NwCentSchlbkBd CGOmega ArialBdlIt NwCentSchlbkIt CGOmegaBd TimesNew NwCentSchlbkBdIt CGOmegalt TimesNewBd Times CGOmegaBdlt TimesNewlt TimesBd Coronet TimesNewBdlt Timeslt ClarendonCd Helvetica TimesBdlt UniversMd HelveticaBd ZapfChanceryMdlt UniversBd HelveticaOb Symbol UniversMdIt HelveticaBdOb SymbolPS UniversBdlt HelveticaNr Wingdings UniversMdCd HelveticaNrBd ZapfDingbats UniversBdCd HelveticaNrOb CourierBd UniversMdCdlt HelveticaNrBdOb Courierlt UniversBdCdIt PalatinoRmn CourierBdlIt AntiqueOlv PalatinoBd LetterGothic AntiqueOlvBd Palatinolt LetterGothicBd AntiqueOlvIt PalatinoBdlt LetterGothiclt GarmondAntiqua ITCAvantGardBk CourierPS GarmondHlb ITCAvantGardDb CourierPSBd GarmondKrsv ITCAvantGardBkOb CourierPSOb GarmondKrtsvHlb ITCAvantGardDbOb CourierPSBdOb Marigold ITCBookmanLt Line Printer 132 Understanding the Printer Menus Symbol Set Purpose To specify a symbol set for a specified font Val
224. lert Use this menu to receive an e mail when the printer needs supplies or intervention Enter your name or the key operator name in the e mail list box to be notified Set E mail Alert also when using the Scan to E mail feature Set Password Use this menu to lock the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool with a password so that other users do not inadvertently change the printer settings you selected K NOTE You must log in as an administrator to use this feature Online Help Click Online Help to visit the Dell Support web site Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 77 Order Supplies at www dell com supplies Contact Dell Support at www dell com support Page Display Format The layout of the page is divided into three sections Top Frame The top frame is located on the top of all pages When the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is activated the current status and specifications of the printer are displayed in the top frame on every page The following items are displayed in the top frame 1 2 34 5 lo E O Ex E gt p e Suframa Aa Dell Color MFP E525w Sener S IPv6 Stateles dress 1 TAA Location Printer Status iS Printer Jobs Printer Settings Print Server Settings Lee Sl Print Volume Printer Status Printer Events Printer Information Adare Bask Printer Status Al Refresh Printer Information ns Cyan Cartridge Level 98 E
225. lick to reset the password for the print drivers and remote client account to default Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 103 SNTP Purpose To configure the SNTP server settings in order to perform time synchronization through SN TP Values SNTP IP Address Host Name Sets the IP address or the host name of the SNTP server Connection Time Out Sets the connection time out period from 1 to 120 seconds Time Synchronization Sets the interval for performing time synchronization using SNTP Interval Last Connection Time Displays the last date and time when your printer was connected to the SNTP server Connection Status Displays the status of the connections between the SNTP server and your printer Bonjour mDNS Purpose To configure the detailed settings for Bonjour Values Host Name Specifies the host name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and dash The original setting will remain valid if nothing is entered Printer Name Specifies the printer name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbol sets E mail Alert Purpose To configure settings for E mail Alert This page can also be displayed by clicking E mail Alert in the left frame Values E mail Server Settings Primary SMTP Gateway Sets the primary SMTP gateway SMTP Port Number Specifies the SMTP port number This must be between and 65535 E mail Send Authentication Specifies the authentication method for outgoing e mail S
226. ll com supplies 093 424 See Replacing Toner Cartridges on page 262 093 425 093 426 093 919 Re install or replace the specified toner cartridge See Replacing Toner Cartridges on page 262 093 920 093 921 093 922 093 930 Remove the specified toner cartridge and install a new one If you do not replace the toner cartridge print 093 931 quality problems may occur Order a new consumable from www dell com supplies 093 932 See Replacing Toner Cartridges on page 262 093 933 Understanding Printer Messages 253 Status code What you can do 093 960 Replace the specified toner cartridge with the supported one Order a new consumable from 093 961 www dell com supplies 093 962 See Replacing Toner Cartridges on page 262 093 963 093 970 Re install the specified toner cartridge See Installing a Toner Cartridge on page 264 093 971 093 972 093 973 116 703 PDL emulation error has occurred Press the Y Set button to clear the message and cancel the current 116 720 print job 117 331 Turn off the printer and then on If this does not solve the problem contact Dell See Contacting Dell on 117 332 page 310 117 333 117 334 117 343 117 346 117 348 117 350 Open the rear cover and close to continue If this does not solve the problem contact Dell See Contacting Dell on page 310 117 366 Turn off the printer and then on If this does not solve the problem contact Dell See Conta
227. llow toner cartridge Magenta Yes Cleans the toner in the magenta toner cartridge No Does not clean the toner in the magenta toner cartridge Cyan Yes Cleans the toner in the cyan toner cartridge No Does not clean the toner in the cyan toner cartridge Black Yes Cleans the toner in the black toner cartridge No Does not clean the toner in the black toner cartridge Transfer Roller Refresh Purpose To specify whether to execute counter measures for curling separating discharge of the paper Values Off Does not automatically execute counter measures for curling separating discharge of the paper On Automatically executes counter measures for curling separating discharge of the paper Initialize NVM Purpose To initialize NVM non volatile memory for system parameters or Address Book data After executing this function and rebooting the printer the menu parameters or data are reset to their default values For details see Resetting Defaults on page 161 Values User Fax Section Yes Initializes the fax number entries in the Address Book No Does not initialize the fax number entries in the Address Book User Scan Section Yes Initializes the e mail and server address entries in the Address Book No Does not initialize the e mail and server address entries in the Address Book System Section Yes Initializes the system parameters No Does not initialize the system parameters 156 Under
228. llowing websites www dell com www dell com ap Asian Pacific countries only www dell com jp Japan only www euro dell com Europe only www dell com la Latin American and Caribbean countries www dell ca Canada only You can access Dell Support through the following websites and e mail addresses Dell Support websites www dell com support support euro dell com Europe only Dell Support e mail addresses mobile_support us dell com support us dell com la techsupport dell com Latin America and Caribbean countries only apsupport dell com Asian Pacific countries only Dell Marketing and Sales e mail addresses apmarketing dell com Asian Pacific countries only sales_canada dell com Canada only Appendix 309 Warranty and Return Policy Dell Inc Dell manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are new or equivalent to new in accordance with industry standard practices For information about the Dell warranty for your printer see www dell com support Recycling Information It is recommended that customers dispose of their used computer hardware monitors printers and other peripherals in an environmentally sound manner Potential methods include reuse of parts or whole products and recycling of products components and or materials For specific information on Dell s worldwide recycling programs see www dell com recyclingworldwide Contacting Dell You can access Dell Suppor
229. ltiple printer drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the desired printer name listed in Printer Name The Tool Box opens Click the Printer Maintenance tab Select Registration Adjustment from the list at the left side of the page The registration adjustment page is displayed 6 Clear the On check box for Auto Registration Adjustment 7 Click Start next to Auto Correct The color registration is corrected automatically Printing the Color Registration Chart Tool Box 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Dell Printers gt Dell Printer Hub Dell Printer Hub opens Select Dell Color MFP E525w print driver at My Printers Click on the link Tool Box from list at the left side of the page K NOTE The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the desired printer name listed in Printer Name The Tool Box opens Click the Printer Maintenance tab Select Registration Adjustment from the list at the left side of the page The registration adjustment page is displayed 6 Clear the On check box for Auto Registration Adjustment 7 Click Start next to Print Color Regi Chart The color registration chart is printed Determining Values On the color registration chart printed find the straightest lines where the two black lines and the colored line are most closely aligned for each color Y M and C If you find the straightest line make
230. lues English Francais Italiano Deutsch Espa ol Nederlands Dansk Norsk Svenska Panel Lock Function This feature prevents unauthorized users from changing settings made by the administrator To limit access to the administrator menu changing the panel lock password from the default is recommended However you can select settings for individual print jobs using the printer driver Enabling the Panel Lock 1 Press the El Menu button Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the W button until Secure Settings is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Panel Lock is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Panel Lock Set is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Enable is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Change Password is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 0 J O Cl Eh Ww N 160 Understanding the Printer Menus 9 Enter the password and then press the Y Set button K NOTE The factory default password is 0000 NOTE If you ever lose or forget the password which you have set turn off and then turn on the printer while pressing the El Menu button to reset the password Disabling the Panel Lock 1 oo JJ O Cl E
231. ly New Settings to apply the new settings K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 97 Values Ethernet Ethernet Settings Auto Detects Ethernet transmission rate and the duplex settings automatically 10Base l Half Duplex Selects 10Base T Half Duplex as the default value 10Base Full Duplex Selects 10Base T Full Duplex as the default value 100Base TX Half Duplex Selects 100Base TX Half Duplex as the default value 100Base TX Full Duplex Selects 100Base TX Full Duplex as the default value Current Ethernet Settings Displays the current settings of Ethernet MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the printer Port Status LPD Specifies whether to enable LPD Port9100 Specifies whether to enable Port9100 IPP Sets whether to enable IPP E mail Alert Specifies whether to enable the E mail Alert feature Bonjour mDNS Specifies whether to enable the Bonjour mDNS feature SNMP Specifies whether to enable the SNMP EWS Specifies whether to enable the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool WSD Specifies whether to enable the Web Services on Devices WSD port SNTP Sets whether to enable SNTP Google Cloud Print Sets whether to enable Google Cloud Print 1 This item is available only when the printer is connected with a wired network Wireless LAN Purpose To configu
232. m USB Defaults Output Color Purpose To specify whether to print in black and white or print in color Values Full Color Black amp White Pages Per Side Purpose To print two or four pages per sheet Values Off Prints one page per sheet 2 Pages Per Side Prints two pages per sheet 4 Pages Per Side Prints four pages per sheet Auto Fit Purpose To proportionally enlarge or reduce images when you print your documents stored in USB memory Values Off Automatically reduces image when it is larger than the paper size Prints as is when image is smaller than the paper size Auto Automatically enlarges or reduces image to fit the paper size PDF Password Purpose To enter the password when you print the secure PDF job Tray Settings Use this menu to set the paper size and type of paper loaded in the standard 150 sheet tray K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings 126 Understanding the Printer Menus MPF Purpose To specify the paper loaded in the standard 150 sheet tray Values Paper Size A4 210 x 297 mm A5 148 x 210 mm B5 182 x 257 mm Letter 8 5 x 11 Folio 8 5 x 13 Legal 8 5 x 14 Executive 7 25 x 10 5 Envelope 10 4 1 x 9 5 Monarch Env 3 9 x 7 5 Monarch Env L 7 5 x 3 9 DL Env 110 x 220 mm DL Env L
233. m is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the W button until Network is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until TCP TP is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until IPv4 Ethernet is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Check the IP address displayed on the operator panel System Settings Report 1 Print the system settings report For details about how to print a system settings report see Printing a Report List Using the Operator Panel on page 129 Check the IP address listed under Wired Network or Wireless Network in the report If the IP address shows 0 0 0 0 the factory default an IP address has not been assigned To assign one for your printer see Assigning an IP Address on page 43 Ping Command Ping the printer and verify that it responds For example at a command prompt on a network computer enter ping followed by the new IP address for example 192 0 2 1 ping 19220 2 1 If the printer is active on the network you will receive a reply Setting the IP Address 45 46 Loading Paper K NOTE To avoid paper jams do not remove the standard 150 sheet tray while printing NOTE Use only laser print media Do not use ink jet paper in your printer K NOTE For printing envelopes see Loading Print Media on page 168 Hold
234. mail Alert Scan to PC Google Cloud Print Proxy Server AirPrint Reset Print Server Security Set Password Authentication System Kerberos Server LDAP Server LDAP Authentication LDAP User Mapping SSL TLS IPsec Display Network Settings IP Filter IPv4 Print Volume Print Volume Address Book Fax E mail Address Book Top Page Address Book Confirm Change Create Address Book Delete FAX Group Top Page FAX Group Confirm Change Create FAX Group Delete E mail Group Top Page E mail Group Confirm Change Create E mail Group Delete E mail Default Setup Server Address Server Address Top Page Server Address Confirm Change Create Server Address Delete Tray Settings 1 This item is available only when the printer is connected with a wireless network 82 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Printer Status Use this menu to check the status of consumables hardware and specifications of the printer Printer Status Purpose To check the status of the consumables and trays Values Cyan Cartridge Level Displays the percentage of toner remaining in each toner cartridge When a cartridge is empty a message appears The text Call or Magenta Cartridge Level pa A i Orderis link
235. med yourself Do not mix print media sizes weights or types in the same print media source Ensure that the recommended print side is face up when you load the print media eep print media stored in an acceptable environment For more information see Storing Print Media on Keep print media stored ptabl t Fi f tion see Storing Print Media page 166 Do not remove the standard 150 sheet tray during a print job Ensure that all cables that connect to the printer are correctly attached Overtightening the width guides and the length guide may cause jams 276 Clearing Jams Identifying the Location of Paper Jams AN WARNING Do not attempt to clear any jams using tools or instruments This may permanently damage the printer The following illustration shows where paper jams may occur along the print media path Scanner Unit Fusing Unit Levers Rear Cover ADF Cover o oo A wy N gt Standard 150 Sheet Tray Clearing Jams 277 Clearing Paper Jams From the ADF When a document jams while it passes through the Automatic Document Feeder ADF remove jams in the following procedure AN WARNING Before performing any of the following procedures read and follow the safety instructions in the mportant Information AN WARNING To prevent electric shock always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from the grounded outlet before performing maintenance AN WARNING To avo
236. meric keypad and then press the Y Set button To search destinations from Phone Book 238 Press the V button until Search Phone Book is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Use the numeric keypad to enter the first character of the group names whose destinations you want to specify and then press the Y Set button Destinations with names beginning with the specified character are displayed Press the V button to move the cursor to the desired destination To check the detailed information of the destination press the button Press the Y Set button to select the destination and then press the gt button Faxing 4 Configure the fax settings as necessary Settings such as resolution and contrast are available To configure these settings press the V button until Preferences is highlighted and then press the Y Set button For details about setting items see Setting Fax Options on page 227 5 Ensure that Start Fax is highlighted and then press the gt Start button When you are using the document glass the display prompts you for another page Press the button to select Yes to add more documents or to select No to send the fax immediately and then press the Y Set button Printing an Address Book List You can check your automatic dial setting by printing an Address Book list 1 Press the El Menu button 2 Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button
237. min Menu and Report List For details see Panel Lock Function on page 160 K NOTE You can select Disable for Panel Lock Set when all items under Function Enabled are setto On and Secure Receive Setissetto Disable Values Panel Lock Set Disable Does not restrict access to Admin Menu and Report List Enable Restricts access to Admin Menu and Report List with a password Change Password Available Range Sets or changes the password required to access Admin Menu and 0000 9999 Report List Understanding the Printer Menus 157 Function Enabled Purpose To specify whether to enable each of the printer services or to require a password to use the services and to set or change the password K NOTE You can access to the items under Function Enabled only when Panel Lock Set is setto Enable Values COPY On Enables the Copy service Off Disables the Copy service On Password Enables the Copy service but requires a password On Color Password Enables the Copy service with a color mode but requires a password FAX On Enables the Fax service Off Disables the Fax service the printer will not send or receive faxes On Password Enables the Fax services but requires a password to send faxes does not require a password to receive incoming faxes SCAN On Enables the Scan service Off Disables the Scan service On Password Enables the Scan service bu
238. mmended settings Type Resolution Documents 300 dpi black and white or 200 dpi grayscale or color Documents of poor quality or that contain small text 400 dpi black and white or 300 dpi grayscale Photographs and pictures 100 200 dpi color or 200 dpi grayscale Images for an inkjet printer 150 300 dpi Images for a high resolution printer 300 600 dpi Scanning beyond these recommended resolutions may exceed the capabilities of the application If you require a resolution above those recommended in the above table you should reduce the size of the image by previewing or pre scan and cropping before scanning the image Scanning From the Operator Panel Using an Application Z NOTE Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer using the USB cable K NOTE You can specify the file type file name and output destination of the scanned file using Dell Document Hub For details see the FAQs in Dell Document Hub 1 Load the document s face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document s in first OR Place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 or Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 Press the gt Scan button Press the V button until Scan to Computer is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Computer is highlighted and then press
239. motor and stir the toner in the toner cartridge to use up a toner cartridge when you need to replace it before the end of its life or to stir the toner in a new toner cartridge Values Clean Developer Click Start to stir the toner in the toner cartridge Yellow Toner Refresh Click Start to clean the toner in the yellow toner cartridge Magenta Toner Refresh Click Start to clean the toner in the magenta toner cartridge Cyan Toner Refresh Click Start to clean the toner in the cyan toner cartridge Black Toner Refresh Click Start to clean the toner in the black toner cartridge Adjust Altitude Purpose To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure Adjustments are performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used K NOTE An incorrect altitude adjustment setting leads to poor printing quality incorrect indication of remaining toner K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Values 0 meter Specifies the altitude of the location where the printer is installed 1000 meters 2000 meters 3000 meters Reset Defaults Purpose To initialize NVM non volatile memory memory for system parameters and Address Book data After executing this function and rebooting the printer the menu parameters or data are reset to the
240. mplete the additional steps in the wizard and then click Finish Print a test page to verify installation a For Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 R2 Click Start gt Devices and Printers Start gt Control Panel Hardware and Sound gt Printers for Windows Server 2008 and Windows Vista For Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Windows Server 2012 and Windows Server 2012 R2 Right click the bottom left corner of the screen and then click Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound Hardware for Windows Server 2012 and Windows Server 2012 R2 gt Devices and Printers b Right click the printer you just created and then click Printer properties Properties for Windows Server 2008 and Windows Vista c Onthe General tab click Print Test Page When a test page is printed successfully installation is complete Setting Up for Shared Printing You can share your USB connected printer with other computers clients on the same network To share your USB connected printer enable shared printing when installing the printer driver You can also enable shared printing by following the procedures below K NOTE Printer utilities such as Tool Box cannot be used from a network client Enabling Shared Printing From the Computer For Windows Server 2003 or Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition 1 2 3 4 5 Click Start gt Printers and Faxes Right click this printer icon and select
241. n Press the V button until System Settings is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Date Time is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Date Format is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until the desired format is highlighted and then press the Y Set button To return to the previous screen press the 9 Back button Faxing Setting Sounds Speaker Volume 1 O Of Eh amp NN Press the El Menu button Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Fax Settings is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Line Monitor is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until the desired volume is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on Ringer Volume 1 O 091 Eh amp N Press the El Menu button Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the W button until Fax Settings is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Ring Tone Volume is highlighted and then press the Y Set button P
242. n Select Add Roles and Features from the Manage menu Click Next on the Before You Begin window gt Select installation type on the Installation Type window gt Select destination server on the Server Selection window in the Add Roles and Features Wizard Select the Print and Document Services check box on the Server Roles window and then click Next Select features on the Features window gt Confirm installation selections on the Confirmation window Click Install Web Services on Devices WSD Printer Setup You can install your new printer on the network using the Add Printer wizard When installing using the Software and Documentation disc that shipped with your printer see Network Connection Setup on page 52 for details K NOTE Installing Web Services on Devices WSD printer for Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2012 and Windows Server 2012 R2 is available only with the Add Printer wizard Installing a Printer Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard K NOTE Before installing the driver using the Add Printer wizard on Windows Server 2008 R2 or Windows 7 perform one of the 56 followings e Establish the Internet connection so that Windows Update can scan your computer e Add the printer driver to your computer in advance For Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 R2 Click Start gt Devices and Printers Sta
243. n specifying the default queue see Setting the Default Queue Setting the Default Queue You can set the default queue when you add the printer 1 2 7 Select Computer More Applications and select YaST on the Application Browser Enter the administrator password and click Continue YaST Control Center is activated Select Hardware on YaST Control Center and select Printer The Printer Configurations dialog box opens Click Edit A dialog box to modify the specified queue opens Confirm that the printer you want to set is selected in the Connection list Select the Default Printer check box Confirm the settings and click OK Specifying the Printing Options You can specify the printing options such as color mode 1 2 3 4 Open a web browser Enter http localhost 63 1 admin in Location and press lt Enter gt Click Manage Printers Click Set Printer Options of the printer for which you want to specify the printing options Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers CUPS 65 5 Specify the required settings and click Set Printer Options 6 Enter root as the user name enter the administrator password and click OK K NOTE Set the password for authority as the printer administrator before setting the printer queue If you have not set it go to Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator The message Printer xxx has been configured successfully appears The setting
244. n Allow Deny Full Control iv Change v Read Y Learn about access control and permissions OK J Camel Apps Click OK K NOTE To add sub folders create new folders in the shared folder you have created Example Folder name MyShare Second level folder name My Pic Third level folder name John You should now see MyShare1MyPicl John in your directory After you created a folder go to Registering Destinations in the Address Book on page 209 For Mac OS X 10 6 OS X 10 7 OS X 10 8 OS X 10 9 and OS X 10 10 1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer Example of folder name MyShare K NOTE Note down the folder name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure 2 Select the created folder and then select Get Info from the File menu 3 Select the Shared folder check box and then close the window 4 Open System Preferences and then click Sharing 5 Select the File Sharing check box and then click Options 6 Select the Share files and folders using SMB Windows Share files and folders using SMB for OS X 10 9 and OS X 10 10 check box and your account name 7 Enter your account password and then click OK 8 Click Done When Using FTP For a destination to store the document contact your system administrator Registering Destinations in the Address Book You can configure the printer settings to use the Scan to Network Folder feature with the Dell Printer Config
245. nd Documentation Disc 42 7 Setting the IP AddresS o o oo ooo o 43 Assigning an IP Address 43 Operator Panels ra uia as a cae 43 TOGIIBOXE el GA ara E E 44 Verifying the IP Address 2 2 a 45 Operator P nel aoa ox a e oe a eee oe 26 SER a 45 System Settings Report aoaaa ee 45 Ping Command sexi a hee a od eee ta Pe 45 8 Loading Paper nie boca ae eee des 46 9 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows fit A a ek tds ele hi 49 Identifying Printer Driver Pre install Status 49 Changing the Firewall Settings Before Installing Your Printer 49 USB Connection Setup o o o 49 Installing PCL PS and Fax Printer Drivers 49 Installing XML Paper Specification XPS Printer Driver 50 Network Connection Setup o o o ee ns 52 Installing PCL PS and Fax Printer Drivers 52 Installing XML Paper Specification XPS Printer Driver 53 Setting Up for Web Services on Devices WSD 5 Adding Roles of Print Services o o e ee eae 55 Web Services on Devices WSD Printer Setup 56 Setting Up for Shared Printing 57 Contents Enabling Shared Printing From the Computer 57 Checking the Shared Printer o
246. nded to clean the ADF feed roller at regular intervals 1 Open the ADF cover 274 Maintaining Your Printer 2 Wipe the ADF feed roller with a dry soft lint free cloth or paper towel until it is clean If the ADF feed roller gets soiled with ink stains paper from the ADF may also be soiled In this case slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with a neutral detergent or water and then remove the contamination from the ADF feed roller until it is clean and dry Maintaining Your Printer 275 Clearing Jams Careful selection of appropriate print media and proper loading allow you to avoid most jams See Print Media Guidelines on page 162 for more information K NOTE Before buying large quantities of any print media it is recommended that you try a sample first Avoiding Jams Use only recommended print media See Print Media Guidelines on page 162 for more information See Loading Print Media in the Standard 150 Sheet Tray on page 168 to load print media properly Do not overload the print media sources Ensure that the stack print media height does not exceed the maximum height indicated by the line with an arrow on the width guides Do not load wrinkled creased damp or curled print media Flex fan and straighten print media before you load it If a jam occurs with print media try feeding one sheet at a time through the standard 150 sheet tray Do not use print media that you have cut or trim
247. nder on the header of faxes On Prints the information of sender on the header of faxes Fax Header Name Purpose To set the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes Up to 30 alphanumeric characters can be entered Fax Number Purpose To set the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of faxes Up to 20 digits can be entered Understanding the Printer Menus 145 Fax Cover Page Purpose To set whether to attach a cover page to faxes Values Off Does not attach a cover page to faxes On Attaches a cover page to faxes DRPD Pattern Purpose To provide a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern Values Pattern1 7 DRPD is a service provided by some telephone companies DRPD Patterns are specified by your telephone company The patterns provided with your printer are shown below Pattern1 Pattern2 Pattern3 Pattern4 fo LY Pattern5 Pattern6 MI MN Pattern7 Ask your telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this service For example Pattern 7 is the New Zealand FaxAbility distinctive ringing pattern rings for 400ms stops for 800ms rings for 400ms and stops for 1400ms This pattern is repeated over and over again This printer only responds to Distinctive Alert cadence s DA4 in New Zealand 146 Understanding the Printer Menus Forward Settings Purpose To
248. ngs before installing the Dell printer software e Microsoft Windows Vista e Windows 7 e Windows 8 e Windows 8 1 e Windows Server 2008 e Windows Server 2008 R2 e Windows Server 2012 e Windows Server 2012 R2 The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example 1 Insert the Software and Documentation disc into your computer Click Start gt Control Panel Select System and Security Click Allow a program through Windows Firewall Click Change settings gt Allow another program Click Browse Enter D setup exe where D is the drive letter of the optical drive in the File name text box and then click Open 8 Click Add and then click OK u O Oo Eh q N USB Connection Setup Installing PCL PS and Fax Printer Drivers 1 Insert the Software and Documentation disc into your computer to start Dell Printer Easy Install 2 Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer using the USB cable and the printer is turned on 3 Click Main Menu 4 Click Connect Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows 49 5 Select USB Cable Connection and then click Next The Plug and Play installation starts and the required driver and software are automatically installed 6 Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Ready to Print screen appears Installing XML Paper Specification XPS Printer Driver K NOTE The XML Paper Specification XPS driver is supported on the following operating syst
249. ngs such as resolution and contrast are available For details about setting items see Setting Fax Options on page 227 Ensure that Start Fax is highlighted and then press the gt Start button Once this setting is activated your printer stores all the documents to be faxed to its memory and sends them at the specified time After faxing is complete the data in the memory is cleared Sending a Fax From Your Computer Direct Fax You can send a fax directly from your computer by using the fax driver K NOTE Only black and white faxes can be sent using Direct Fax Send data via the fax driver Send fax NY gt Sending machine your Receiving machine fax 7 printer machine multifunction printer Faxing 229 For Windows K NOTE The names of the windows and the buttons may be different from those given in the following procedure depending on the application you are using Y NOTE To use this feature you must install the fax driver 1 Open the file you want to send by fax 2 Open the print dialog box from the application and then select Dell Color MFP E525w Fax 3 Click Preferences General Select Printer Badd Printer Sifax S Deli Color MFP E525w Fax am Microsoft XPS Documen A Dell Color MFP E525w PCL6 m Status Ready Print to file Preferences Location Page Range 9 Al Number of copies 1 Selection Curent Page
250. nned image softer than the original Softest 122 Understanding the Printer Menus Auto Exposure Purpose To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the scanned image Values Off Does not suppress the background On Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the scanned image Margin Top Bottom Purpose To specify the value of the top and bottom margins Values 2 mm 0 1 inch Specify the value in increments of 1 mm 0 1 inch Available Range 0 50 mm 0 0 2 0 inch Margin Left Right Purpose To specify the value of the left and right margins Values 2 mm 0 1 inch Specify the value in increments of 1 mm 0 1 inch Available Range 0 50 mm 0 0 2 0 inch Margin Middle Purpose To specify the value of the middle margin Values 0 mm 0 0 inch Specify the value in increments of 1 mm 0 1 inch Available Range 0 50 mm 0 0 2 0 inch TIFF File Format Purpose To specify the default TIFF file format Values TIFF V6 Sets the default TIFF file format to TIFF V6 TTN2 Sets the default Tiff file format to TTN2 Understanding the Printer Menus 123 Image Compression Purpose To specify the image compression level Values High Sets the image compression level to High Medium Sets the image compression level to Medium Low Sets the image compression level to Low Max E mail Size Purpose To s
251. nnot scan using TWAIN or WIA on a Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2 computer 304 Troubleshooting Install the Desktop Experience feature on the computer To install Desktop Experience 1 Click Start point to Administrative Tools and then click Server Manager 2 Under Features Summary click Add Features 3 Select the Desktop Experience check box click Next and then click Install 4 Restart the computer Problem Action Cannot scan using TWAIN or WIA on a Windows Server 2012 or Windows Server 2012 R2 computer Install the Desktop Experience feature on the computer To install Desktop Experience 1 Click Server Manager from the Start screen The Server Manager screen appears 2 Under Manage click Add Roles and Features Add Roles and Features Wizard appears 3 Click Next to skip the Before you begin page 4 Ensure that Role based or feature based installation is selected and then click Next 5 Ensure that Select a server from the server pool is selected select the server under Server Pool and then click Next 6 Click Next to skip the Select server roles page 7 Select the Desktop Experience check box under User Interfaces and Infrastructure and then click Next 8 Click Confirmation from the list on the left 9 Select the Restart the destination server automatically if required check box and then click Install 10 Restart the computer Digital Certificate Problems
252. ns from LDAP Server K NOTE The printer needs to be configured in order to access an LDAP server See Authentication System and LDAP Server on page 108 a Pressthe V button until Search Network Phone Book is highlighted and then press the Y Set button b Use the numeric keypad to enter the first character of the personal names whose destinations you want to specify and then press the Y Set button Destinations with names beginning with the specified character are displayed c Press the V button to move the cursor to the desired destination To check the detailed information of the destination press the button d Press the Y Set button to select the destination and then press the gt button 4 Configure the fax settings as necessary Settings such as resolution and contrast are available To configure these settings press the W button until Preferences 1s highlighted and then press the Y Set button For details about setting items see Setting Fax Options on page 227 5 Ensure that Start Fax is highlighted and then press the gt Start button 236 Faxing When you are using the document glass the display prompts you for another page Press the YW button to select Yes to add more documents or to select No to send the fax immediately and then press the Y Set button Group Dial If you frequently send the same document to several destinations you can create a group of these destinations and set them under
253. nter Inserting back the tray displays the message on the LCD panel prompting you to specify the paper size in the tray 7 Press the Y button until the appropriate paper size is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 8 Press the V button until the appropriate paper type is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 170 Loading Print Media Loading Envelopes K NOTE When you print on envelopes be sure to specify the envelope setting on the printer driver If not specified the print image will be rotated 180 degrees K NOTE If you do not load envelopes in the standard 150 sheet tray right after they have been removed from the packaging they may bulge To avoid jams flatten the envelops before loading And then firmly press down on the entire surface of the envelops as shown below Z NOTE You can load up to 5 envelopes at a time When Loading Envelope 10 DL or Monarch Load envelopes with the flaps closed Place the print side facing up and the flaps come at the right when you face towards the printer Loading Print Media 171 To prevent DL and Monarch from being wrinkled they are recommended to be loaded with the flaps opened Place the print side facing up and the flaps come at the bottom when you face towards the printer When Loading C5 Load envelopes with the flaps opened Place the print side facing up and the flaps come at the bottom when you face towards the printer NM CAU
254. nter The Printer Configurations dialog box opens For network connections a Click Add The Add New Printer Configuration dialog box opens b Click Connection Wizard The Connection Wizard dialog box opens c Select Line Printer Daemon LPD Protocol from Access Network Printer or Printserver Box via d Enter the IP address of the printer in IP Address or Host Name 64 Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers CUPS e Select Dell in the Select the printer manufacturer drop down menu f Click OK The Add New Printer Configuration dialog box appears g Select your printer name from the Assign Driver list K NOTE You can specify the printer name in Set Name h Confirm the settings and click OK For USB connections a Click Add The Add New Printer Configuration dialog box opens The printer name is displayed in the Determine Connection list b Select your printer name from the Assign Driver list K NOTE You can specify the printer name in Set Name c Confirm the settings and click OK Printing From the Applications When you have finished setting up the queue you can print jobs from the applications Start the print job from the application and specify the queue in the print dialog box However sometimes you can print only from the default queue depending on the application for example Mozilla In these cases before you start printing set queue you want to print to as the default queue For information o
255. o 229 Sending a Fax From Your Computer Direct Fax 229 Recelving a acota A ke RS 233 About Receiving Modes o o o e eae 233 Loading Paper for Receiving FaxeS o o e 233 Receiving a Fax Automatically inthe Fax Mode 233 Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode 233 Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Telephone Fax or Ans Machine AA A A E RN 233 Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone 233 Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD Mode 234 Receiving Faxes in the Memory o o o e 234 Polling Recelve idas a a ad 234 Automatic Dialing o o es 235 Speed Dial ice oir a 235 Setting Speed Dial o o e e 235 Sending a Fax Using Speed Dial o o 235 Group Dial io A rd o i 231 Setting Group Dial o o e e e 231 Editing Group Dial gt econo rs Oe da e da e 231 Sending a Fax Using Group Dial Multi address Transmission 238 Printing an Address Book List 0 o o 239 Other Ways to Fax oo ooo Oe Ra eR eS 239 Using the Secure Receiving Mode o 239 Using an Answering Machine o o 240 Using a Computer Modem o o e e 240 Printing a Report o ooo e 241 Contents 11 Changing Fax Defaults
256. o oo e 300 Jamra ee A O 300 Misfeed Jam ooh ene Ab oe ea a o ee ra 300 Multi feed Jam aaa ee 301 Copy Problem 2 lt o ce ee ee ee es 302 Fax Problems 2 7 3 csr trata RRR eG eae Bala fo 302 ScanningProblems o o eae 303 Digital Certificate Problems 0 0000 ewes 305 Wi Fi Direct Problems 200 00000 eee 306 Scanner Driver Printer Utility Problems 306 Wireless Problems o o o o o oo 306 14 Contents ANDEAN sis is aes e 308 A IN a at als Saat E 309 Dell Technical Support Policy o o o o 309 Online Services s et rd e a he hs 309 Warranty and Return Policy o 310 Recycling Information o o o o o 310 Contacting Dell o ee 310 New Zealand PTC200 WarningS 311 General Warning e 311 2 11 1 Compliance Testing 6 amp 7 Functional Tests 311 4 5 1 Off hook Line Impedance o o e 311 4 9 3 Non voice Equipment o o o 311 5 6 1 General Requirements Automatic Dialling Devices 311 5 5 5 User Instructions 2 0 200000 a 311 8 1 7 User Instructions Automatic Call Set up 311 8 2 1 b Call Answering 2 2 ee o 311 USA Canada Wi Fi Warnings 0 0 0000 312 FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION INTE
257. o reset the correct time and date if loss of power to the printer occurs 1 u oO 0d RA W N 10 11 12 Press the E Menu button Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the W button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until System Settings is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Date Time is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Set Date is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Enter the correct date using the numeric keypad or press the W button to select the correct date K NOTE If you make a mistake while entering numbers press the lt button to re enter the digit Press the Y Set button when the date on the display is correct Press the V button until Set Time is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Enter the correct time using the numeric keypad or press the W button to select the correct time Press the Y Set button when the time on the display is correct To return to the previous screen press the 5 Back button Changing the Clock Mode You can set the current time using either the 12 hour or the 24 hour format 0 Ny QO GCO Aa Y N 222 Press the E Menu button Press the W button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set butto
258. oblem Action Cannot setup wireless connection Ensure that the Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer Ensure that Wi Fi is set to On See Wi Fi on page 142 Try disabling the firewall on your computer The firewall on your computer may be blocking communication with your printer Cannot setup wireless connection with WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup Ensure that the security setting of the wireless LAN access point or router is WPA or WPA2 WEP is not supported on WPS Cannot setup wireless connection with the WPS PBC Wi Fi Protected Setup Push Button Configuration Press the WPS button on the wireless LAN access point or router within 2 minutes after starting the WPS operation on the printer For details about the wireless LAN access point or router refer to the manual supplied with the wireless LAN access point or router Cannot setup wireless connection with WPS PIN Wi Fi Protected Setup Personal Identification Number Check if the PIN you have entered on the computer is correct 306 Troubleshooting Other Problems Problem Action Condensation has occurred inside the This usually occurs within several hours after you heat the room in winter This printer also occurs when the printer is operating in a location where relative humidity reaches 85 or more Adjust the humidity or relocate the printer to an appropriate environment Contacting Service When you call f
259. of the ID card turn it over press the V button until Continue is highlighted and then press the Y Set button b To finish scanning without scanning the rear side of the ID card press the V button until Save Now is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Sending an E mail With the Scanned Image To send an e mail attached with the scanned image from your printer follow the steps below Set up E mail Server Settings of E mail Alert on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool See E mail Alert on page 104 for more details For information about your e mail server contact your system administrator or your local Internet service provider ISP Register e mail addresses in the Address Book using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool See Setting an E mail Address Book on page 216 for more details Setting an E mail Address Book 1 2 Open a web browser Enter the IP address of the printer in the address bar and click Go The printer s web page appears K NOTE For details on how to check the IP address of the printer see Verifying the IP Address on page 45 216 Scanning 3 4 5 Click Address Book The login dialog box appears Qoe Ps ed Dell Color MFP E525w IPv4 tI 255 DS a IPv6 Link Local Address IPv6 Stateless Address 1 Location Printer Status Contact Person Printer Jobs English Y Printer Settings Print Server Settings f Primer statu
260. ollowing Set Number of Redial to the larger value e Set Resend Delay orRedial Delay longer e LowerModem Speed 034 716 Press the Set button to clear the message If the error continues to appear after the redial for the specified number of times it will be canceled When retrying sending the fax lower Modem Speed 034 717 Press the Set button to clear the message If the error continues to appear after the redial for the specified number of times it will be canceled Retry sending the fax 034 718 Press the Set button to clear the message If the error continues to appear after the redial for the 034 719 specified number of times it will be canceled When retrying sending the fax lower Modem Speed 034 720 Press the Set button to clear the message If the error continues to appear after the redial for the specified number of times it will be canceled When retrying sending the fax try the following e Lower Modem Speed e Enable ECM 034 721 Press the Set button to clear the message If the error continues to appear after the redial for the 034722 Specified number of times it will be canceled When retrying sending the fax lower Modem Speed 034 723 034 724 034 725 034 726 034 727 Press the Set button to clear the message Check if the destination number is available If the error continues to appear after the redial for the specified number of times it wil
261. omatic Dialing Speed Dial You can store up to 99 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations 01 99 When the speed dial job specified in the delayed fax or redial exists you cannot change the speed dial number from the operator panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Setting Speed Dial 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 Press the E Menu button Press the W button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the W button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Phone Book is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Speed Dial is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the W button until the desired speed dial number between 01 and 99 is highlighted and then press the Y Set button The fax numbers registered in the dial numbers between 01 and 04 are also allocated to the One Touch Dial buttons between 01 and 04 We recommend that you register the most frequently used destinations in these buttons to directly call up Ensure that Name is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Enter the name and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Phone Number is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Enter the number you want to store using the numeric keypad and then press the Y Set button To insert a pause between numbers press the Y Redial Pause button appears on the display
262. on country specific factory default Web Link Customization Purpose To specify a link used for ordering consumables which can be accessed from Order Supplies at in the left frame Values Select Reorder URL Select the Regular or Premier web address to be linked to Order Supplies at in the left frame Regular Displays the regular web address http accessories us dell com sna that can be linked to Order Supplies at in the left frame Premier Displays the premier web address http premier dell com that can be linked to Order Supplies at in the left frame Print Server Settings Use this menu to set the type of printer interface and necessary conditions for communications The following tabbed pages are displayed in the top of the right frame Print Server Reports This tab contains the Print Server Setup Page and E mail Alert Setup Page Print Server Setup Page Displays the current settings of TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol and printing ports 96 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool E mail Alert Setup Page Displays the current settings of the e mail server Print Server Settings This tab contains the Basic Information Port Settings Wireless LAN Wi Fi Direct TCP IP SNMP SNTP Bonjour mDNS E mail Alert Scan to PC Google Cloud Print Proxy Server AirPrint and Reset Print Server pages Basic Information Purpose To configure the basic information of the pr
263. on until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Report List is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until the report or list you want to print is highlighted and then press the Y Set button The selected report or list is printed Changing Fax Defaults out Aa U N Press the El Menu button Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Defaults Settings is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Fax Defaults is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the W button until the desired menu item is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the gt or V button until the desired setting is highlighted or enter the value using the numeric keypad and then press the Y Set button Repeat steps 5 and 6 as needed To return to the previous screen press the 5 Back button Faxing 241 Know Your Printer 242 21 Understanding Your Printer Software occccicncmommmm 243 22 Using Digital Certificates sisstin 244 23 Understanding Printer Messages ccnoccccicccncnnonconcninnenonnos 248 ESPEC CAOS aa 255 Understanding Your Printer Software Use the Software and Documentation disc that shipped with your printer to install a combination of software programs depending on your operating system For details on how to use your softw
264. onfiguration Web Tool To open the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool use the link local address To check a link local address see Verifying the IP Address on page 45 K NOTE Depending on the address class the range of the IP address assigned may be different On Class A for example an IP address in the range from0 0 0 0to127 255 255 255 will be assigned For assignment of IP addresses contact your system administrator You can assign the IP address by using the operator panel or using the Tool Box The following procedure describes how to assign an IP address manually as an example Operator Panel For more information on using your operator panel see Operator Panel on page 70 K NOTE A password is required to enter Admin Menu when Panel Lock Set is setto Enable In this case enter the oo nr i ow hy NS _ So 11 12 13 14 15 password you specified and press the V Set button Press the El Menu button Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the W button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the W button until Network is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until TCP IP is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until IPv4 Ethernet is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Get IP Address is highlighted and then press the Y Set button
265. ons have been set successfully appears The setting is complete Uninstalling the Printer Driver 1 Select Applications System Tools gt Terminal 2 Enter the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue su Enter the administrator password usr sbin lpadmin x Enter the print queue name 3 Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers CUPS 63 4 Enter the following command in the terminal window su Enter the administrator password rpm e Dell Color MFP E525w The printer driver is uninstalled Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 Setup Overview 1 Install the printer driver 2 Set up the print queue 3 Specify the default queue 4 Specify the printing options Installing the Printer Driver 1 Select Computer gt More Applications and select GNOME Terminal on the Application Browser 2 Enter the following command in the terminal window su Enter the administrator password rpm ivh Enter the file path Dell Color MFP E525w x x x noarch rpm The printer driver is installed Setting Up the Queue To execute printing you must set up the print queue on your workstation 1 Select Computer More Applications and select YaST on the Application Browser 2 Enter the administrator password and click Continue YaST Control Center is activated 3 Select Hardware on YaST Control Center and select Pri
266. or by phone To order by phone see Contacting Dell on page 310 It is recommended that you use Dell toner cartridges for your printer Dell does not provide warranty coverage for problems caused by using accessories parts or components not supplied by Dell AN WARNING Never throw used toner cartridges into fire The residual toner could explode resulting in burns and injuries A WARNING Do not shake the used toner cartridge to avoid spilling of toner Removing the Toner Cartridges 1 Turn off the printer 2 Open the toner access cover 262 Maintaining Your Printer 3 Pinch the cartridge firmly as shown in the illustration 2 AN WARNING Always pull the cartridge out slowly so you do not spill any toner 4 Pull the toner cartridge out Maintaining Your Printer 263 Installing a Toner Cartridge 1 Unpack a new toner cartridge of the desired color and shake it five to six times to distribute the toner evenly Z NOTE Ensure that the color of the new toner cartridge matches that on the handle before replacing it gt K NOTE Handle the toner cartridge carefully to avoid spillage of the toner 2 Remove the tape from the toner cartridge ea 3 Adjust the toner cartridge to the associated cartridge holder and then insert it firmly by pressing near the center of the label until the cartridge clicks 264 Maintaining Your Printer 4 Close the toner access cover 5 Tum on the
267. or printer service be prepared to describe the problem you are experiencing or the error message on the display You need to know the model type and Service Tag number of your printer See the label located inside the side door of your printer and write down the Service Tag number For details on the location of the Service Tag see Express Service Code and Service Tag on page 19 Troubleshooting 307 Appendix A wieder ead 308 Appendix Dell Technical Support Policy Technician assisted technical support requires the cooperation and participation of the customer in the troubleshooting process and provides for restoration of the operating system software program and hardware drivers to the original default configuration as shipped from Dell as well as the verification of appropriate functionality of the printer and all Dell installed hardware In addition to this technician assisted technical support online technical support is available at Dell Support Additional technical support options may be available for purchase Dell provides limited technical support for the printer and any Dell installed software and peripherals Support for third party software and peripherals is provided by the original manufacturer including those purchased and or installed through Software amp Peripherals DellWare ReadyWare and Custom Factory Integration CFI DellPlus Online Services You can learn about Dell products and services on the fo
268. ormation of the destination press the button d Press the gt button repeatedly to display TO or BCC as a destination type and then press the Y Set button 5 Press the V button until Preferences is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 6 Ensure that From Setting is highlighted and then press Y Set button K NOTE If this setting item is not displayed make sure thatEdit From Fieldissetto Enable For details see Edit From Field on page 159 Scanning 219 7 9 220 Specify the sender address of the e mail using the numeric keypad or the Address Book The specified address is notified to the recipient when the e mail is sent If no e mail address is specified here the address in Reply Address is notified as a sender information instead For details see E mail Alert on page 104 K NOTE Be sure to specify an e mail address either in From Setting orinReply Address Otherwise the printer cannot start sending the e mail Configure the scan settings as necessary Settings such as file format and color mode are available For details about setting items see Scan Defaults on page 121 Ensure that Start Scan is highlighted and then press the gt Start button Scanning Faxing K NOTE If the Function Enabled setting for FAX is setto On Password you need to enter the four digit password to use the fax function If the Function Enabled setting for FAX is set to Of f the fax function is
269. ost name of the printer Hide Network Information Does not show network information Scan to E mail Use this menu to edit the transmission source K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Edit From Field Purpose To specify whether to enable editing of the transmission source when you use Scan to E mail Values Disable Disables editing of the transmission source Enable Enables editing of the transmission source USB Settings Use this menu to change USB interface settings K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings USB port Purpose To enable or disable the USB interface The change takes effect after the printer is turned off and then on Values Disable Disables the USB interface Enable Enables the USB interface Understanding the Printer Menus 159 PS Data Format Purpose To specify the PostScript 3 Compatible communication protocol You can configure the PS Data Format settings for the wired network Values Auto Sets the PostScript 3 Compatible communications protocol automatically Standard Sets the PostScript 3 Compatible communications protocol to Standard BCP Sets the PostScript 3 Compatible communications protocol to BCP TBCP Sets the PostScript 3 Compatible communications protocol to TBCP Panel Language Purpose To specify the language to be used on the operator panel Va
270. ostScript Settings PDF Settings Secure Settings Copy Defaults Copy Color Balance Copy Settings Scan Defaults USB Direct Print Defaults Fax Defaults and Fax Settings pages System Settings Purpose To configure the basic printer settings Values Power Saver Timer Sleep Specifies the time taken by the printer before it enters the power saver timer mode after it finishes a job Power Saver Timer Deep Sleep Specifies the time taken by the printer before it enters the power saver timer mode 2 after it goes into the power saver timer mode 1 Auto Reset Specifies the time taken by the printer before it automatically resets the settings for Copy Scan or Fax on the operator panel to the defaults when no additional settings are made Panel Select Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is correct or disables the tone Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Panel Alert Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is incorrect or disables the tone Job Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job is complete or disables the tone Alert Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a problem occurs or disables the tone Out of Paper Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer runs out of paper or disables the tone Auto Clear Alert Tone Se
271. ou store the document in a shared folder of your computer Select FTP if you use a FTP server 3 Server Address Enter a server name or IP address of your computer or the FTP server that you have shared out IPv4 and IPv6 are both supported The following are examples e For FTP Server name myhost example com myhost host name example com domain name IP address IPv4 192 0 2 1 e For SMB Server name myhost IP address IPv4 192 0 2 1 4 Share Name For SMB only On the Windows operating system enter the share name of the folder to store the scanned document on the recipient computer On the Mac OS enter the folder name to store the scanned document on the recipient computer Scanning 211 5 Server Path For SMB To store the scanned document in the share folder directly without creating any subfolder leave the space blank To store the scanned document in the folder you created under the share folder enter the path as following Example Share Folder name MyShare Second level folder name MyPic Third level folder name John You should now see MyShare MyPic John in your directory J MyShare Share folder L MyPic L 7 John In this case enter the following item Server Path MyPic John For FTP Enter the server path to store the scanned document 6 Server Port Number Enter the Server Port Number If you are unsure you can enter the default value of 139 for SMB and 21 for FTP
272. ox The default user name is admin and the default password is left blank NULL You can change only the password in the Set Password page in the Security menu For more information see Set Password on page 107 Details of the Menu Items Printer Status Printer Status Printer Events Printer Information Printer Jobs Job List Completed Jobs Printer Settings Printer Settings Report Menu Settings Reports Printer Settings System Settings USB Settings PCL Settings PostScript Settings PDF Settings Secure Settings Copy Defaults Copy Color Balance Copy Settings Fax Defaults Fax Settings Scan Defaults Print from USB Defaults Printer Maintenance Paper Density Adjust Transfer Roller Adjust Fusing Unit Auto Registration Adjustment Color Registration Adjustment Clean Developer Adjust Altitude Reset Defaults Non Dell Toner Clock Settings Web Link Customization Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 81 Print Server Settings Print Server Reports Print Server Setup Page E mail Alert Setup Page Print Server Settings Basic Information Port Settings Wireless LAN Wi Fi Direct TCP IP SNMP SNTP Bonjour mDNS E
273. pecify the interval between transmission attempts within the range of 3 to 255 seconds The default is 8 seconds Redial Attempts Purpose To specify the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax number is busy within the range of 0 to 9 If you enter 0 the printer will not redial The default is 3 144 Understanding the Printer Menus Redial Delay Purpose To specify the interval between redial attempts within the range of 1 to 15 minutes The default is 1 minute Junk Fax Setup Purpose To accept faxes only from the numbers registered in the Phone Book This feature is useful for blocking any unwanted faxes Values Off Does not reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers On Rejects faxes sent from unwanted numbers K NOTE Ensure to specify the fax numbers before using Junk Fax Setup Remote Receive Purpose To receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone after picking up the handset of the telephone Values Off Does not receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone On Receives a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone Remote Rev Tone Purpose To specify the remote receive code within the range of 00 to 99 to start Remote Receive feature The default is 00 Fax Header Purpose To print the information of sender on the header of faxes Values Off Does not print the information of se
274. pecify the maximum size of e mail that can be sent within the range of 50 K bytes to 16384 K bytes The default is 2048 K bytes File Naming Mode Purpose To specify the details of File Naming Mode Values Auto Sets the default file name Add Prefix Adds texts in front of the file name Add Suffix Adds texts after the file name Create Folder Purpose To specify whether to create a folder when saving scanned images Values Off Does not create a folder when saving a scanned image On Creates a folder when saving a scanned image K NOTE This feature is available only for Scan to USB or Scan to Network Prefix Suffix String Purpose To specify the texts to be added K NOTE This is available only when File Naming Mode is setto Add PrefixorAdd Suffix Fax Defaults Use this menu to configure a variety of fax features K NOTE The FAX service cannot be used unless you set up a country code under Country If Country is not set up a message Set The Country Code appears on the display K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings 124 Understanding the Printer Menus Resolution Purpose To specify the resolution level to be used for fax transmission Values Standard Suitable for documents with normal sized characters Fine Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot matrix printer
275. phone Network PSTN Private Branch Exchange PBX Data coding Black amp White 1bit JBIG MMR MR MH encoding Color Not supported Max modem speed 33 6 Kbps Transmission speed Approx 3 seconds page Transmission time applies to memory transmission of text data scanned in Standard resolution with ECM using only ITU T No 1 Chart Scanning speed Document glass approx 3 seconds A4 at standard fax resolution mode ADF approx 5 seconds Letter at standard fax resolution mode 7 5 seconds Letter at fine fax resolution mode Maximum document length Document glass 297 mm 11 69 inches ADF 355 6 mm 14 inches Paper size Letter A4 Legal Resolution Standard 8 pels mm 203 pels inch x 3 85 lines mm 98 lines inch 200 dpi x 100 dpi Fine 8 pels mm 203 pels inch x 7 7 lines mm 196 lines inch 200 dpi x 200 dpi Super Fine 8 pels mm 203 pels inch x 15 4 lines mm 391 lines inch 200 dpi x 400 dpi Ultra Fine 16 pels mm 406 pels inch x 15 4 lines mm 391 lines inch 400 dpi x 400 dpi User memory 2 MB Halftone 256 levels Specifications 259 Maintaining Your Printer 25 Maintaining YOUR Pre daas 20 Gleanna JAMS bos 260 Maintaining Your Printer Periodically your printer requires you to complete certain tasks to maintain optimum print quality If several people are using the printer you may want to designate a key operator to maintain
276. ple Up on page 196 Printing From USB Memory USB Direct Print ALT Ta USB Direct Print feature allows you to print directly from your USB memory without the need to turn on your computer and printing using an application program For more information see Direct Print Using the USB Memory For more information see Loading Print Media When Manual USB Direct Print on page 180 Duplex Printing on page 174 Wireless Connection ID Card Copy Wireless Connection feature allows you to install the printer at ID Card Copy feature allows you to copy both sides of an ID any location and enables printing and other services without a card on one side of a single sheet of paper in its original size wired connection to your computer For more information about wireless connection settings see Wireless Connection on page 30 20 Product Features For more information see Copying an ID Card on page 199 Dell Document Hub Easily access and share documents images and digital content with the Dell Document Hub App This innovative cloud collaboration solution connects your printer and devices to popular cloud services providing a flexible and secure way to collaborate from virtually anywhere Using your computer or mobile device you can search file across multiple cloud services simultaneously to print documents or you can scan documents directly to th
277. print media from the print media path 1 Push the rear cover release handle and open the rear cover 284 Clearing Jams 2 Lift up the levers 3 Remove any jammed paper from the back of the printer If no paper is found in the paper path face the front of the printer and check the output tray Clearing Jams 285 5 Remove any jammed paper from the output tray 286 Clearing Jams 8 Close the rear cover Clearing Jams 287 Troubleshooting A A 288 Troubleshooting Basic Printer Problems Some printer problems can be easy to resolve If a problem occurs with your printer check each of the following The power cable is connected to the printer and to a properly grounded electrical outlet e The printer is turned on e The electrical outlet is not turned off at any switch or breaker e Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working If you have checked all of the above and still have a problem turn off the printer wait for 10 seconds and then turn on the printer This often fixes the problem K NOTE If error messages are displayed on the operator panel or on your computer screen follow the on screen instructions to resolve the printer problems For details about error messages and status codes see Understanding Printer Messages on page 248 Display Problems Problem Action Menu settings changed from the operator panel have no effect Settings in t
278. printer Cleaning Inside the Printer A WARNING To prevent electric shock always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from the grounded outlet before performing maintenance 1 Confirm that the printer is not in operation and open the toner access cover Maintaining Your Printer 265 2 Pinch the cartridge firmly as shown in the illustration 2 3 Pull the toner cartridge out 4 Pull the other three cartridges out as well 5 Pull the cleaning rod out 266 Maintaining Your Printer 6 Insert the cleaning rod fully into the hole beside the arrow on the printer until its tip reaches the interior of the printer as illustrated below and then pull it out 7 Repeat the same procedure for the other three holes 8 Insert the cleaning rod back to its original location 9 Replace the black cartridge by adjusting it to the associated cartridge holder and then insert it firmly by pressing near the center of the label until the cartridge clicks Maintaining Your Printer 267 10 Replace the other three cartridges as well 11 Close the toner access cover Cleaning the Color Toner Density CTD Sensor Clean the CTD sensor only when an alert for the CTD sensor is shown on the operator panel 1 Ensure that the printer is turned off 2 Push the rear cover release handle and open the rear cover 268 Maintaining Your Printer 3 Clean the CTD sensor inside the printer with a clean
279. r OK Cancel Apply Scanning 207 Click the Sharing tab and then click Advanced Sharing Select the Share this folder check box 5 Entera shared name in the Share name box K NOTE Note down the shared name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure Advanced Sharing v Share this folder Settings Share name MySharel Add Remove Limit the number of simultaneous users to 10 2 Comments Permissions Caching Ga aa 6 Click Permissions to give write permission for this folder Click Add 8 Search user login name by clicking Advanced or enter the user login name in the Enter the object names to select box and click Check Names to confirm Example of user login name Myself Select Users or Groups a Select this object type Users Groups or Built in security principals Object Types Erom this location XXXX Locations Enter the object names to select examples Myself Check Names ss 9 Click OK when you are done 10 Click the user login name that you have just entered Select the Full Control check box This will grant you permission to send the document to this folder Y NOTE Do not use Everyone as the user login name 208 Scanning 11 a Permissions for New Folder E Share Permissions Group or user names A Everyone Myself XXXXx Add Remove Permissions for Kari
280. r 2012 R2 The Scan using Dell E525w Scanner window appears K NOTE The illustration may vary for different operating systems San eng DEN EAn Scanner Ea What do you wantto scan Desserts 11 Paper source f Flatbed x Select an option below for the type of picture you want to scan El Color picture E Grayscale picture a Black and white picture or text Custom Settings You can also Adjust the quality of the scanned picture Select your scanning preferences and click Adjust the quality of the scanned picture to display the Advanced Properties dialog box Select the desired properties including brightness and contrast and then click OK Click Scan to start scanning Click Save As from the File menu Enter a picture name and select a file format and destination to save the picture Scanning 203 Scanning to a Computer or Server via SMB FTP Overview The Scan to Network Folder feature allows you to scan documents and send the scanned document to a network computer via the FTP or SMB protocol Scan Es Computer FTP Server Using FTP Using SMB Lay You can select the kind of server and specify a destination to store the scanned document with the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool or Address Book Editor The following items are required to use the Scan to Network Folder feature e Using SMB To transfer data via SMB your computer must run on one of
281. r Speed Displays the processing speed Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 83 Printer Revision Levels Firmware Version Displays the version of the controller Network Firmware Version Displays the NIC version Printer Jobs This menu contains information on the Job List and Completed Jobs pages These pages show the details of the status regarding each protocol or the print jobs Job List Purpose To confirm the print jobs that are being processed Click Refresh to update the screen Values ID Displays the job ID Job Name Displays the file name of the job being printed Owner Displays the name of the job owner Host Name Displays the name of the host computer Job Status Displays the status of the job being printed Job Type Displays the type of the job Host 1 F Displays the status of the host interface Job Submitted Time Displays the date when the print job was submitted Completed Jobs Purpose To check the completed jobs Up to 20 latest jobs are displayed Click Refresh to update the screen Values ID Displays the job ID Job Name Displays the file name of the job Owner Displays the name of the job owner Host Name Displays the name of the host computer Output Result Displays the status of the job Job Type Displays the type of the job Impression Number Displays the total number of pages used by the print job No of Sheets
282. r mode when it receives data from the computer You can also return the printer to the standby mode by pressing any button on the operator panel 2 Available only in the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool and the Tool Box 3 The default varies depending on country specific factory default USB Settings Purpose To change USB settings on your printer Values Port Status Enables the USB interface on your printer PS Data Format Sets PostScript 3 Compatible communication protocol for each interface PCL Settings Purpose To change the PCL settings Values Paper Size Sets the paper size Orientation Sets how text and graphics are oriented on the page Font Sets the font from the list of registered fonts Symbol Set Sets a symbol set for the specified font Font Size Sets the font size for scalable typographic fonts Font Pitch Sets the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts Form Line Sets the number of lines in a page Quantity Sets the number of copies to print 86 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Draft Mode Sets whether to print in the draft mode Line Termination Sets how to handle line terminations Output Color Sets whether to print in color or in black and white PostScript Settings Purpose To change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PostScript 3 Compatible emulation printer language Values PS Error Report Sets wh
283. r more information click Help Click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box Click Print to send the job to the selected printer Printing 177 Canceling a Print Job There are several methods for canceling a print job Canceling From the Operator Panel To cancel a job after it has started printing 1 Press the X Cancel button K NOTE Printing is canceled only for the current job All the following jobs will continue to print Canceling a Job From the Computer Running Windows Canceling a Job From the Taskbar When you send a job to print a small printer icon appears in the right corner of the taskbar 1 Double click the printer icon A list of print jobs appears in the printer window 2 Select the job you want to cancel 3 Press lt Delete gt on the keyboard Canceling a Job From the Desktop 1 Minimize all programs to reveal the desktop Click Start gt Devices and Printers for Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 Click Start gt Printers and Faxes for Windows Server 2003 Click Start gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers for Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 Right click the bottom left corner of the screen and then click Control Panel Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers for Windows 8 and Windows 8 1 Right click the bottom left corner of the screen and then click Control Panel Hardware gt Devices and Printers for Windows Server 2012 and Win
284. r my printer e Answers to technical service and support questions e Documentation for my printer Go to www dell com support www dell com support provides several online tools including e Solutions Troubleshooting hints and tips articles from technicians and online courses e Upgrades Upgrade information for components such as printer driver e Customer Care Contact information order status warranty and repair information Downloads Drivers e Manuals Printer documentation and product specifications Go to www dell com support Select your region and fill in the requested details to access help tools and information Finding Information 19 Product Features Scanning to USB Memory Scan to USB Memory y EC Scan to USB Memory feature allows you to save the scanned documents directly to the USB memory that is connected to the printer s USB port For more information see Scanning to USB Memory on page 215 2 Sided Printing Manual Duplex Print Manual Duplex Print feature allows you to print two or more pages on the front and back side of a single sheet of paper manually Using this feature you may reduce the paper consumption Printing Multiple Pages on a Single Sheet of Paper Multiple Up Multiple Up feature allows you to print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper Using this feature you may reduce the paper consumption For more information see Multi
285. r of copies copy size contrast and image quality For more information see Setting Copy Options on page 191 To clear the settings press the X Cancel button Ensure that Start Copy is highlighted and then press the gt Start button to start copying NOTE Press the X Cancel button to cancel a copy job while scanning a document Setting Copy Options Set the following options for the current copy job before pressing the gt Start button to make copies Z NOTE The copy options automatically return to their default status after copying Number of Copies To specify the number of copies from 1 to 99 1 2 3 Load the document s face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document s in first OR Place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 or Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 Press the B Copy button Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad to select the desired value Copying 191 Color To select mode for color or black and white copying 1 Non Load the document s face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document s in first OR Place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 or Making Copies From the Document G
286. r password Name of Shared Directory Enter the share name Windows OS or folder name Macintosh OS of the shared folder You do not need to specify this setting for an FTP server Subdirectory Path optional Leave blank if there is no second or third level folder 92 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Prefix Dial Specifies whether to set a prefix dial number Prefix Dial Number Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits This number prioritizes over any auto dial number It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange PABX Discard Size Sets whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper Selecting Auto Reduction automatically reduces the fax page to fit it onto the output paper and does not discard any images or text at the bottom of the page ECM Sets whether to enable the ECM To use the ECM the remote machines must also support the ECM Modem Speed Specifies the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs Fax Activity Sets whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications Fax Transmit Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs Fax Broadcast Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations or only when an
287. rPrint The following procedure uses the iPhone running iOS8 1 as an example 1 Open your e mail photo web page or document you want to print 2 Tap the action icon rh 3 Tap Print 4 Select your printer and set printer options 5 Tap Print Printing With Google Cloud Print This section provides information for Google Cloud Print service with your smart phone tablet or any other device By registering the printer to your Google account you can use the Google Cloud Print service to print from various devices connected to the Internet You can print documents photos or e mails using the Google Chrome browser or applications such as Google Drive on your mobile device For more information about Google Cloud Print visit the Google web site TM Preparing to Use the Printer with Google Cloud Print To use Google Cloud Print you need to prepare the following in advance e Connect the printer to a network that has access to the Internet K NOTE Google Cloud Print supports only IPv4 connection K NOTE If the printer is connected to a network that uses a proxy server you need to specify the settings in Proxy Server from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool For more information see Proxy Server on page 106 e Acquire a Google account and a Gmail M address e Set Google Cloud Print to Enable from the operator panel menu or set Google Cloud Print to On from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool When us
288. re wireless network settings To connect the printer to a wireless network be sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable K NOTE Once wireless LAN is activated wired LAN protocol will be disabled K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings 98 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Values Wireless Settings Wireless LAN Specifies whether to enable wireless connection SSID Specifies the name that identifies the wireless network using up to 32 alphanumeric characters Network Type Specifies the network type from either Ad Hoc or Infrastructure MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the wireless network setting of the printer Link Channel Displays the channel number of the wireless connection of the printer Link Quality Displays the quality of the wireless network connection of the printer Security Settings Encryption Select the security method from the list No Security Specifies No Security to configure the wireless setting without specifying a security method from WEP WPA2 PSK AES and Mixed Mode PSK WEP 64 Bit ASCII 5 Bytes Specifies the WEP 64 Bit ASCII to use through the wireless network 4 WEP 128 Bit ASCII 13 Bytes Specifies the WEP 128 Bit ASCII to use through the vireless network zZ WEP 64 Bit Hex 10 Bytes Nn pecifies the WEP 64 Bit Hex to se through the wireless network Sc WEP 128 Bit Hex 26 Bytes Specifies the W
289. reate your own default copy settings Values Color Selects mode for color or black and white copying Reduce Enlarge Sets the default copy reduction enlargement ratio Custom Reduce Enlarge Sets a custom reduction enlargement ratio within the range of 25 to 400 when Reduce Enlarge is set to Custom Original Type Sets the copy image quality Document Size Sets the default document size Lighter Darker Sets the default copy density level Sharpness Sets the default sharpness level Auto Exposure Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy 88 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Copy Color Balance Purpose To specify the default color balance level Values Color Balance Red Sets the color balance level of red Color Balance Green Sets the color balance level of green Color Balance Blue Sets the color balance level of blue Gray Balance Sets the gray balance level Copy Settings Purpose To configure the copy settings K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Values Multiple Up Off Does not perform multiple up printing Auto Automatically reduces the size of original images to fit onto one sheet of paper Manual Prints the original images onto one sheet of paper in the size specified in Reduce Enlarge Collated Sets whether to sort the copy
290. ress the V button until the desired menu item is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 7 To return to the previous screen press the Back button To receive faxes in the DRPD you need to set the menu to DRPD mode see Available Fax Settings Options on page 224 Your printer provides seven DRPD patterns If this service is available from your telephone company ask your telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this service Receiving Faxes in the Memory Since your printer is a multi tasking device it can receive faxes while you are making copies or printing If you receive a fax while you are copying printing or run out of paper or toner your printer stores incoming faxes in the memory Then as soon as you finish copying printing or re supply the consumables the printer automatically prints the fax Polling Receive You can receive faxes from the remote fax machine when you want to receive it Press the lt gt Fax button Enter the fax number of the remote fax machine using the numeric keypad and then press the Y Set button Press the W button until Preferences is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the W button until Polling Receive is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until On is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Ensure that Start Fax is highlighted and then press the gt Start button ao oo FF U N 234 Faxing Aut
291. ress the W button until the desired volume is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on Specifying the Fax Settings Changing the Fax Settings Options 1 O oo wn OO oO Eh 0 DY Press the El Menu button Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the W button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Fax Settings is highlighted and then press the v Set button Press the W button until the desired menu item is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the gt or V button until the desired setting is highlighted or enter the value using the numeric keypad Press the Y Set button to save the selection If necessary repeat steps 5 to 7 To return to the previous screen press the 5 Back button Faxing 223 Available Fax Settings Options You can use the following settings options for configuring the fax system Option Description Receive Mode Telephone Automatic fax reception is turned off You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external telephone and then pressing the remote receive code Fax Automatically receives faxes Telephone Fax When the printer receives an incoming fax the external telephone rings for the time specified in Auto Rec TEL FAX and then the printer automatically receives a fax I
292. rinter USB port A ASH a ta TI l 3 Connect the other end of the cable into a USB port of your computer NM CAUTION Do not connect the printer USB cable to a USB port on the keyboard Ethernet Connection To connect the printer to a network 1 Ensure that the printer computer and any other connected devices are turned off and unplugged from the power source outlet 2 Connect one end of an Ethernet cable into the Ethernet port at the rear of the printer and the other end to a LAN drop or hub To setup a wireless connection see Wireless Connection on page 30 Ethernet port Connecting Your Printer 29 K NOTE Connect the Ethernet cable only when you need to setup a wired connection Wireless Connection Following are the specifications for a wireless setup Item Specification Connectivity Wireless Connectivity standard IEEE 802 11b g n compliant Bandwidth 2 4 GHz Data transfer rate IEEE 802 11b mode 11 5 5 2 1 Mbps IEEE 802 11g mode 54 48 36 24 18 12 9 6 Mbps IEEE 802 11n mode 65 Mbps Security 64 40 bit key 128 104 bit key WEP WPA PSK AES WPA2 PSK AES IEEE 802 1x attestation function of WPA 1x non corresponds Mixed Mode PSK Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS Push Button Configuration PBC Personal Identification Number PIN l WPS 2 0 compliant WPS
293. rl or twist Are stuck together or damaged in any way Contain windows holes perforations cutouts embossing Use metal clasps string ties or metal folding bars Have an interlocking design Have postage stamps attached Have nicked edges or bent corners Have rough cockle or laid finishes Labels Your printer can print on many labels designed only for use with laser printers When selecting labels Label adhesives face sheet printable stock and topcoats must be able to withstand temperatures of 205 C 401 F and pressure of 25 pounds per square inch psi Use labels that can be without sealing excessive curling wrinkling or releasing hazardous emissions Do not use label sheets with a slick backing material lv CAUTION Before buying large quantities of any print media it is recommended that you try a sample first When printing on labels Use labels that can withstand temperatures of 205 C 401 F without sealing excessive curling wrinkling or releasing hazardous emissions Set the paper type to Label from the printer driver Do not load labels together with paper in the same tray Do not print within 1 mm 0 04 inches of the die cut Do not print within 1 mm 0 04 inches of the edge of the label of the perforations or between die cuts of the label Do not print a label through the printer more than once Portrait orientation is preferred especially when printing bar cod
294. rs entered from the computer e Directory paths lt gt Key on the keyboard of the computer e Indicates a path to a certain item within a procedure on a computer e Cross references in this manual e Characters entered from the operator panel e Messages displayed on the computer screen 18 Dell Color Multifunction Printer E525w User s Guide Finding Information What are you looking for Find it here e Drivers for my printer e My User s Guide Software and Documentation disc The Software and Documentation disc contains setup video documentation and drivers for your printer You can use the disc to install re install drivers or access your setup video and documentation Readme files may be included on your disc to provide last minute updates about technical changes to your printer or advanced technical reference material for experienced users or technicians e How to use my printer e How to set up my printer Setup Guide e Safety information e Warranty information Important Information WARNING Read and follow all safety instructions in the Important Information prior to setting up and operating your printer e Troubleshooting Troubleshooting on page 289 Express Service Code and Service Tag Service Tag Express Service Code XXXXXXX 000 000 000 00 The Express Service Code and Service Tag are located inside the side door of your printer e Latest drivers fo
295. rt gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers for Windows Server 2008 and Windows Vista For Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Windows Server 2012 and Windows Server 2012 R2 Right click the bottom left corner of the screen and then click Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound Hardware for Windows Server 2012 and Windows Server 2012 R2 gt Devices and Printers Click Add a printer For Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Windows Server 2012 and Windows Server 2012 R2 go to step 4 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows Select Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer In the list of available printers select the one you want to use and then click Next Select the printer whose address is displayed in the form of http IP address ws K NOTE If no printer is displayed in the list follow the instructions below to enter the printer s IP address manually to directly specify the printer you want to use For Windows Server 2008 R2 you must be a member of Administrators group 1 Click The printer that want isn t listed 2 Select Add a printer using a TCP IP address or hostname and then click Next 3 Select Web Services Device from Device type 4 Enter the printer s IP address in the Hostname or IP address text box and then click Next Install the printer driver on your computer If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation enter the password or provide confirmation Co
296. s o e Printer Status Printer Jobs Printer Settings Print Server Settings Print Volume Address Book Printer Information Tray Settings E Mail Alert Set Password Online Help Order Supplies at www dell com supplies Contact Dell Support at apt ee Location Contact Person Engish Dell Color MFP E525w Py w Pv6 Link Local Address 7 AS RR Pv6 Stateless Address 1 PADE 7 4 PE ALME Y l Printer Status Printer Status Printer Events Printer Information Printer Status Refresh Cyan Cartridge Level 98 Magenta Cartridge Level 99 Yellow Cartridge Level 96 Black Cartridge Level 97 Paper Trays Status Capacity Size Multipurpose Feeder No Cassette 150 sheets A4 210x 297 mm Output Tray Status Capacity Output Tray OK 450 sheets Cover Rear Cover ADF Cover Click Print Server Settings Click Wireless LAN Click Apply New Settings Click Restart Printer oo N OORA GQ Click the Print Server Settings tab Change the wireless setting of the printer Change the wireless settings on your computer or access point accordingly K NOTE To change the wireless settings on your computer refer to the manuals provided with the wireless adapter or if your computer provides a wireless adapter tool change the wireless settings using that tool 34 Connecting Your Printer Connecting the Telephone
297. s Printer Status Printer Events Printer Information Print Volume Address Book Printer Status Refresh Printer Information Tray Settings Cyan Cal Level 98 Enter the correct user name and password Y NOTE The default user name is admin and the default password is left blank NULL Click Create oe Had Dell Color MFP E525w IPv4 Tit AR EELS IPv6 Link Local Address IPv6 Stateless Address 1 5 CUL ae Location Printer Status Contact Person Printer Jobs Engish v Printer Settings Print Server Settings FaxlE Mail Server Address Print Volume Address Book FAX Group E Mail Group E Mail Default Setup Address Book i Kink Address List to 001020 02040 Used 061080 0609F Printer Information ID Name Phone Number EMail Address i 001 Not in Use ay eR 002 Not in Use Create E Mail Alert 003 Not n Use 004 Not in Use Set Password 005 Not in Use Create Online Help DOSE Create D07 Notin Use Order Supplies at 008 Not in Use Create www dell com supplies 009 Not n Use Contact Dell Support at UE emt Gee bart 011 Not in Use Create 012 Not in Use 013 Not in Use 014 Not in Use Create 015 Not in Use 016 Not in Use Create 017 Not in Use Create 018 Not in Use 019 Not in Use 020 Not in Use Create Scann
298. s 3 Click the Security tab gt SSL TLS 4 Click Create New Certificate The Generate Certificate page is displayed 5 Specify each item of the displayed settings and then click Generate Certificate Your request was successfully processed is displayed 6 Click Back 7 Select the Enabled check box of SSL TLS Server Communication and then click Apply New Settings Settings have been changed Restart printer for new settings to take effect is displayed 8 Click Restart Printer 244 Using Digital Certificates Exporting a Certificate Signing Request CSR EZ NOTE To export a CSR from the printer SSL TLS Server Communication must be enabled with a self signed certificate For details see Preparing to Use HTTPS Communication on page 244 NOTE If you are using a PKCS 12 digital certificate do not export the CSR otherwise the file cannot be uploaded Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser For more information see Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool on page 75 Click Print Server Settings Click the Security tab gt SSL TLS Click Certificate Signing Request CSR The Certificate Signing Request CSR page is displayed Specify each item of the certificate signing request and then click Apply New Settings Confirm the specified settings and then click Export Save a CSR file to your computer Use this CSR to receive a signed certificate from
299. s si ii srta o a tet 257 12 Contents Print Specifications o o o 257 Copy Specifications o o e 258 Scanner Specifications o o o o e 258 Facsimile Specifications o o e 259 Maintaining Your Printer 00005 260 25 Maintaining Your Printer 261 Determining the Status of Supplies 261 Conserving Supplies o o o 261 Storing Print Media o 261 Storing Consumables 262 Replacing Toner Cartridges o o 262 Removing the Toner Cartridges o o 262 Installing a Toner Cartridge o o o 264 Cleaning Inside the Printer o 265 Cleaning the Color Toner Density CTD Sensor 268 Adjusting Color Registration o 269 Performing Auto AdjUSt o o 269 Printing the Color Registration Chart o o 270 Determining Values o o 270 Entering Valles lt ros bed tod teas o rr dd e ea 211 Cleaning the Scanner o 272 Cleaning the ADF Feed Roller o 274 26 Clearing Jams vse co ceveneamewa ae cen cae cass 276 Avoiding Jams 1 ee 276 Identifying the Location of Pap
300. s for your printer See Supported Paper Sizes on page 166 for more information Fan the print media before loading it Ensure that the print media is loaded correctly Ensure that the width guides and the length guide are adjusted correctly Do not overfill the print media sources Do not force print media into the standard 150 sheet tray when you load it Otherwise it may skew or buckle Ensure that the print media is not curled Load the recommended print side correctly for the type of print media you are using See Loading Print Media on page 168 for more information Turn the print media over or around and try printing again to see if feeding improves Do not mix print media types Do not mix reams of print media Remove the top and bottom curled sheets of a ream before loading the print media Load a print media source only when it is empty The envelope is creased after printing Ensure that the envelope is loaded as instructed in Loading Envelopes on page 171 Page breaks in unexpected places Increase the setting for Time Out in the Printer Settings menu in the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Print media does not stack neatly in the output tray Turn the print media stack over in the standard 150 sheet tray Printer does not duplex pages Select Flip on Short Edge or Flip on Long Edge from the Duplex menu on the General or Paper Output ta
301. s highlighted and then press the Y Set button 4 Press the V button until Network is highlighted and then press the v Set button 5 Press the V button until WPS Setup is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 6 Press the V button until PIN Code is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 7 Write down the displayed 8 digit PIN code or select Print PIN Code to print the PIN code 8 Ensure that Start Configuration is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 9 Ensure that WPS AP Searching is displayed and enter the PIN code you checked in step 7 into the wireless LAN access point Registrar or router K NOTE For WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point Registrar or router refer to the manual supplied with the product When the wireless LAN connection setting is completed the Wi Fi WPS button lights up Auto SSID Setup K NOTE A password is required to enter Admin Menu when Panel Lock Set is setto Enable In this case enter the password you specified and press the V Set button 1 Press the El Menu button 2 Press the V button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 3 Press the V button until Admin Menu is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 4 Press the V button until Network is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 5 Press the V button until Wireless Setup is highlighted and then press the Y Set button The printer automatically s
302. s incoming faxes to the fax number specified in Fax Forward Number below without printing Print and Forward Prints and forwards incoming faxes to the fax number specified in Fax Forward Number below E mail only Forwards incoming faxes to the e mail address specified in Forwarding E mail Address of Fax Settings on page 91 without printing The faxes are converted to a PDF file and sent to the destination as an e mail attachment E mail and Print Prints and forwards incoming faxes to the e mail address specified in Forwarding E mail Address of Fax Settings on page 91 The faxes are converted to a PDF file and sent to the destination as an e mail attachment Forward to Server Forwards incoming faxes to the server specified in from Server Type through Subdirectory Path optional of Fax Settings on page 91 without printing The faxes are converted to a PDF file and stored in the destination Fwd to Server and Print Prints and forwards incoming faxes to the server specified in from Server Type through Subdirectory Path optional of Fax Settings on page 91 The faxes are converted to a PDF file and stored in the destination Fax Fwd Number Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded Prefix Dial Specifies whether to set a prefix dial number Prefix Dial Num Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits This number prioritizes over any auto dia
303. s the Y Set button Change the file name that already exists on the SMB server 031 558 Press the Y Set button to clear the message Check if the access setting to the SMB server is correct 031 571 Press the Y Set button to clear the message Check if the network is properly connected 031 574 Press the Y Set button Check if the domain name of the FTP server is correct 031 575 Press the Y Set button Check if the host name setting to the FTP server is correct 031 576 Press the Y Set button Check if the printer communicates with forwarding destination FT P server For example check connection of Ethernet cable and if the IP address of the server is correct 031 578 Press the Y Set button Check if login name user name and password are correct 031 579 Press the Y Set button Check if the working path setting to the FTP server is correct 031 582 Press the Y Set button Check if the FTP server encounters any write protection or disk problem 031 584 Press the Y Set button Check the following e If the file name you specified is not used by other users e If file or folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists e If the FTP server encounters any write protection or disk problem 031 585 Press the Y Set button Check if the FTP server encounters any delete write protection or disk problem 031 587 250 Understanding Printer Messages Status code What you can do
304. s turned off and then on Values IP Mode Dual Stack Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to set the IP address IPv4 Mode Uses IPv4 to set the IP address IPv4 Ethernet Get IP Address AutoIP Automatically sets the IP address IPv4 Wireless BOOTP Uses BOOTP to set the IP address RARP Uses RARP to set the IP address DHCP Uses DHOP to set the IP address Panel Manually sets the IP address on the operator panel IP Address Manually sets the IP address allocated to the printer Subnet Mask Manually sets the subnet mask Gateway Address Manually sets the gateway address 140 Understanding the Printer Menus IPy4 Wi Fi IP Address Manually sets the IP address allocated to the printer Direct Subnet Mask Manually sets the subnet mask Gateway Address Manually sets the gateway address IPSec Disable Enable 1 This item is available only when the Ethernet cable is disconnected and Wi Fi is set to On 2 This item is available only when IP Sec is Enable on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Protocol Purpose To enable or disable each protocol The change takes effect after the printer is turned off and then on Values LPD Disable Disables the Line Printer Daemon LPD port Enable Enables the LPD port Port9100 Disable Disables the Port9100 port Enable Enables the Port9100 port IPP Disable Disables IPP por
305. secure PDF file Paper Size Purpose To specify the output paper size for PDE Values A4 210x297mm Letter 8 5x11 Auto Layout Purpose To specify the output layout Values Auto 100 No Zoom 2 Pages Per Side 4 Pages Per Side 136 Understanding the Printer Menus Output Color Purpose To specify the color mode to color or black and white Values Color Prints in the color mode Works well with texts and photos Black amp White Prints in the black and white mode Works well with texts Network Use this menu to change the printer settings affecting jobs sent to the printer through the wired or wireless network K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Ethernet Purpose To specify the communication speed and the duplex settings of Ethernet The change takes effect after the printer is turned off and then on Values Auto Detects the Ethernet settings automatically 10BASE T Half Uses 10base T half duplex 10BASE T Full Uses 10base T full duplex 100BASE TX Half Uses 100base TX half duplex 100BASE TX Full Uses 100base TX full duplex K NOTE This item is not displayed when the Ethernet cable is disconnected and Wi Fi is setto On Wireless Status Purpose To display the information on the wireless signal strength No changes can be made on the operator panel to improve the status of the wirele
306. set whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination Values Off Does not forward incoming faxes Forward Only Forwards the incoming faxes to a specified destination Print and Forward Prints the incoming fax and forwards it to a specified destination E mail only Forwards the incoming faxes to a specified e mail address E mail and Print Forwards the incoming faxes to a specified e mail address and also prints them Forward to Server Forwards the incoming faxes to a specified server Fwd to Server and Forwards the incoming faxes to a specified server and also prints them Print Fax Fwd Number Purpose To enter the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded Up to 50 digits can be entered Prefix Dial Purpose To select whether to set a prefix dial number Values Off Does not set a prefix dial number On Sets a prefix dial number Prefix Dial Num Purpose To set a prefix dial number of up to five digits This number prioritizes over any auto dial number It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange PABX Discard Size Purpose To set whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper Values Off Prints any excess at the bottom of a fax page without discarding it On Discards any excess at the bottom of a fax page Auto Reduction Automatically
307. sheet tray Is the problem recovered The task is complete Proceed to the action corresponding to the type of the print media being used e Thick 2a e Thin 2b e Envelope 2c If performing manual duplex printing go to action 2d If using paper other than the above or if not performing duplex printing go to action Ze 2a Use thick paper that is 163 g m or less Is the problem recovered The task is complete Go to action 3a 2b Use thin paper that is 60 g m or more Is the problem recovered The task is complete Go to action 3a 2c Ensure that the envelope is properly loaded in the standard 150 sheet tray as instructed in Loading Envelopes on page 171 Is the problem recovered 300 Troubleshooting The task is complete Go to action 3b Action Yes 2d Ensure that the print media is not curled The task is complete Go to action 3a Is the problem recovered 2e Is the print media damp Go to action 3c Go to action 3a 3a Fan the print media The task is complete Go to action 3c Is the problem recovered If you are performing manual duplex printing or if using an envelope contact Dell 3b If the envelope is deformed correct it or use another envelope The task is complete Go to action 3a Is the problem recovered 3c Turn over the print media The task is complete Go to action 4 Is the problem recovered 4 Use print media t
308. ss the Y Set button K NOTE You can set the number of copies for printing in the print driver Deleting Stored Jobs A job that has been stored will be deleted after printing You can also select the menu on the operator panel to delete the stored job before printing K NOTE All the jobs in the memory are cleared when the printer is turned off Direct Print Using the USB Memory USB Direct Print This feature allows you to print files stored in a USB memory using the operator panel Z NOTE Connecting devices other than USB memory to the USB port of the printer may cause damage to your printer K NOTE Do not remove the USB memory from the USB port until the printer has finished printing K NOTE If the Function Enabled setting for USB Print is setto On Password you need to enter the four digit password to use the print function If the Function Enabled setting for USB Print is setto Of f the print function is disabled For details see Function Enabled on page 158 Supported File Formats The following file types can be printed directly from a USB memory PDF e MultiPageTIFF TIFF single page only e JPEG Printing a File in a USB Memory 1 Insert a USB memory to the USB port of the printer K NOTE Ensure that the data in the USB memory was created by this printer using scan features 2 Pressthe Y button until Print From is highlighted and then press the V Set button Select Document appears 180
309. ss connection Values Connection Good Indicates good signal strength Acceptable Indicates marginal signal strength Low Indicates insufficient signal strength No Reception Indicates that no signal is received SSID Displays the name that identifies the wireless network Encryption Type Displays the encryption type No Security WEP WPA2 1 PSK AES Mixed Mode PSK 1 WPA stands for Wi Fi Protected Access Z NOTE This item is displayed when the Ethernet cable is disconnected and Wi Fi is setto On Understanding the Printer Menus 137 Wireless Setup Purpose To configure the wireless network interface The printer automatically searches available access points Select one of the access points and enter a passphrase or WEP key to complete the wireless setup You can also configure the wireless network manually Values Select Access Selects the access point from the list WEP Key Entry When you select an access point using WEP as the security method enter the 10 or 26 digit WEP key For 64 bit keys enter 10 hexadecimal characters For 128 bit keys enter 26 hexadecimal characters PassPhrase Entry When you select an access point using WPA WPA2 or Mixed as the security method enter the passphrase of 8 to 63 bytes ASCII or 64 hexadecimal characters Manual Setup Enter Network SSID Specifies a name to identify the wireless network Up to 32 alphanumeric c
310. standing the Printer Menus Non Dell Toner Purpose To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer K NOTE Using non Dell brand toner cartridges may make some printer features unusable reduce print quality and decrease the reliability of your printer Dell recommends only new Dell brand toner cartridges for your printer Dell does not provide warranty coverage for problems caused by using accessories parts or components not supplied by Dell K NOTE Before you use toner cartridge of another manufacturer be sure to restart the printer Values Off Does not use toner cartridge of another manufacturer On Uses toner cartridge of another manufacturer Adjust Altitude Purpose To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure Adjustments are performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used K NOTE An incorrect altitude setting leads to poor printing quality incorrect indication of remaining toner Values 0m 1000m 2000m 3000m Specifies the altitude of the location where the printer is installed Secure Settings Use this menu to set a password to limit access to the menus This prevents items from being changed accidentally K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings Panel Lock Purpose To restrict access to Ad
311. t Enable Enables IPP port WSD Disable Disables the Web Services on Devices WSD port Enable Enables the Web Services on Devices WSD port SNMP Disable Disables the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP UDP port Enable Enables the SNMP UDP port E mail Alert Disable Disables the E mail Alert feature Enable Enables the E mail Alert feature EWS Disable Disables an access to Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool embedded in the printer Enable Enables an access to Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool embedded in the printer Bonjour mDNS Disable Disables the Bonjour mDNS Enable Enables the Bonjour mDNS HTTP SSL TLS Disable Disables HT T P SSL TLS Enable Enables HTTP SSL TLS Google Cloud Print Disable Disables Google Cloud Print Enable Enables Google Cloud Print SNTP Disable Disables SNTP Enable Enables SNTP IP Filter Purpose To block data received from certain IP addresses through the wired or wireless network You can set up to five IP addresses The change takes effect after the printer is turned off and then on Understanding the Printer Menus 141 Values No n Address Sets the IP address for Filter x n is 1 5 No n Mask Sets the address mask for Filter z n is 1 5 No n Mode Reject Rejects an access from the specified IP address n is 1 5 Accept Accepts an access from the specified IP address Off Disables the feature for Filter n K NOTE This item is only availabl
312. t System Tools gt Terminal Enter the following command in the terminal window sudo dpkg i Enter the file path del1 color mfp SILO xo x El CED Enter the administrator password The printer driver is installed Setting Up the Queue To execute printing you must set up the print queue on your workstation 1 2 3 4 5 Open the URL http localhost 631 using a web browser Click Administration Click Add Printer Enter the user name and the administrator password and click OK Select either of the following according to the type of your printer connection For network connections a Select LPD LPR Host or Printer from the Other Network Printers menu and click Continue b Enter the IP address of the printer in Connection and click Continue Format lpd XXX XXX XXX XXX the IP address of the printer For USB connections a Select your printer name from the Local Printers menu and click Continue Enter the name of the printer in the Name box in the Add Printer window and click Continue You can optionally specify the location and description of the printer for further information If you want to share the printer select the Share This Printer check box Select Dell from the Make menu and click Continue Select your printer name from the Model menu and click Add Printer The setup is complete Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers CUPS 67 Printing From the Applications When you have fin
313. t Wi Fi Direct certified or a device with WPS PBC Wi Fi Protected Setup Push Button Configuration WPS PIN Wi Fi Protected Setup Personal Identification Number proceed to step 8 Printing 181 10 11 12 13 14 NOTE To setup the wireless network using WPS a Press the V button until WPS Method is highlighted and then press the V Set button b Select Push Button Configuration for WPS PBC or PIN Code for WPS PIN Press the Y button until Group Role is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Group Owner is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button until Device Name is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Enter the printer name for searching your printer on a wireless network Press the V button until Connection Status is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Ensure that no other device is connected via the Wi Fi Direct network K NOTE When other device is connected the device name is displayed on the screen you cannot use the Wi Fi Direct connection Disconnect the other device from the Wi Fi Direct network For details see Disconnecting Wi Fi Direct Network on page 183 Reboot the printer after you complete the Wi Fi Direct settings After the reboot repeat steps from l to 5 Press the Y button until SSID is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Enter the network name of your wireless network Press the Y button unt
314. t at www dell com support Select your region on the WELCOME TO DELL SUPPORT page and fill in the requested details to access help tools and information You can contact Dell electronically using the following addresses World Wide Web www dell com www dell com ap Asian Pacific countries only www dell com jp Japan only www euro dell com Europe only www dell com la Latin American and Caribbean countries www dell ca Canada only e Electronic Support Service mobile_support us dell com support us dell com la techsupport dell com Latin America and Caribbean countries only apsupport dell com Asian Pacific countries only support jp dell com Japan only support euro dell com Europe only e Electronic Quote Service apmarketing dell com Asian Pacific countries only sales_canada dell com Canada only 310 Appendix New Zealand PTC200 Warnings General Warning The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom nor does it provide any sort of warranty Above all it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom s network services Warnings taken from Specification text 2 1
315. t for labels within the range of 3 to 3 Coated Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for coated paper within the range of 3 to 3 Recycled Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for recycled paper within the range of 3 to 3 Envelope Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for envelopes within the range of 3 to 3 Auto Registration Adjustment Purpose To specify whether to automatically adjust color registration Color Registration Adjustment Purpose To manually adjust color registration Color registration adjustment need to be made during the initial setup of the printer or when the printer is moved to a different location K NOTE The Color Registration Adjustment feature can be configured when Auto Registration Adjustment is set to Off 94 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Values Auto Correct Click Start to perform color registration adjustment Color Registration Specifies lateral perpendicular to paper feed direction color adjustment values individually for Y Adjustment 1 Lateral Yellow M Magenta C Cyan within the range of 5 to 5 Color Registration Specifies process paper feed direction color adjustment values individually for LY Left Yellow Adjustment 2 Process LM Left Magenta LC Left Cyan RY Right Yellow RM Right Magenta and RC Right Cyan within the range of 5 to 5 Clean Developer Purpose To rotate the developer
316. t onto one sheet of paper Manual Prints the original images onto the one sheet of paper in the size specified in Reduce Enlarge Margin Top Bottom Purpose To specify the value of the top and bottom margins Values 4 mm 0 2 inch Specify the value in increments of 1 mm 0 1 inch Available Range 0 50 mm 0 0 2 0 inch Margin Left Right Purpose To specify the value of the left and right margins Values 4 mm 0 2 inch Specify the value in increments of 1 mm 0 inch Available Range 0 50 mm 0 0 2 0 inch 120 Understanding the Printer Menus Margin Middle Purpose To specify the value of the middle margin Values 0 mm 0 0 inch Specify the value in increments of 1 mm 0 1 inch Available Range 0 50 mm 0 0 2 0 inch Scan Defaults Use this menu to configure a variety of scanner features K NOTE Values marked by an asterisk are the factory default menu settings File Format Purpose To specify the file format to save the scanned image Values PDF MultiPage TIFF TIFF JPEG Color Purpose To set whether to scan in color or in black and white Values Black amp White Scans in black and white mode Color Scans in color mode Color Button Set Purpose To assign color mode to the color mode switch button Values B amp W Button Black amp White Scans in black and white when Black amp White
317. t requires a password USB Print On Enables the USB Print service Off Disables the USB Print service On Password Enables the USB Print service but requires a password On Color Password Enables the USB Print service with a color mode but requires a password Change Password Sets or changes the password required to use the Copy Scan Fax and USB Print services Secure Receive Purpose To specify whether to require a password to print incoming faxes and to set or change the password When Secure Receive Set is set to Enable the printer stores incoming faxes and prints them when the correct password is entered on the operator panel K NOTE You can access to the items under Secure Receive Set onlywhen Panel Lock Set is setto Enable Values Secure Receive Set Disable Does not require a password to print incoming faxes Enable Requires a password to print incoming faxes Change Password Available Range Sets or changes the password required to print incoming faxes 0000 9999 158 Understanding the Printer Menus Software Download Purpose To enable or disable download of firmware updates Values Disable Disables firmware updates Enable Enables firmware updates Display Network Information Purpose To show or hide network information in the message field of the top menu screen Values Show IPv4 Address Shows the IPv4 address of the printer Show Host Name Shows the h
318. t the System Settings or display the TCP IP Settings page which lists the IP address For details about how to find your printer s IP address see Verifying the IP Address on page 45 76 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Overview of the Menu Items Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool for Printer Status Use this menu to get feedback on the printer status When a toner cartridge is running low click the order supplies link on the first screen to order an additional toner cartridge Printer Jobs Use this menu to contain information on the Job List page and Completed Jobs page These pages show the details of the status regarding each protocol or job Printer Settings Use this menu to change printer settings and view the settings in the operator panel remotely Print Server Settings Use this menu to change the type of printer interface and necessary conditions for communications Print Volume Use this menu to check the number of pages printed for each paper size Address Book Use this menu to view or edit the e mail address phone number server address and fax number entries in the Address Book or to register new entries K NOTE You must log in as an administrator to use this feature Printer Information Use this menu to display the information of your printer Tray Settings Use this menu to get information about the paper size and type of paper loaded in the standard 150 sheet tray E mail A
319. t you place the document to be scanned face down from the document glass or face up in the ADE There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan Try the preview function to see if that works Try lowering the scan resolution rate Check that the Ethernet or USB cable is connected properly Ensure that the Ethernet or USB cable is not defective Switch the cable with a known good cable If necessary replace the cable Check that the scanner is configured correctly Check the application you want to use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port The printer scans very slowly Graphics are scanned more slowly than text when using the Scan to E mail or Scan to Network Folder feature Communication speed becomes slow in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image Scanning images at a high resolution takes more time than scanning at a low resolution Document misfeeds or multiple feeds occur in the ADE Ensure that the document s paper type meets the specifications for the printer See Supported Paper Types on page 167 for more information Check whether the document is properly loaded in the ADE Ensure that the document guides are adjusted properly Ensure that the number of document sheets do not exceed the maximum capacity of the ADE Ensure that the document is not curled
320. tallation Click Finish For Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition K NOTE You must log in as an administrator 1 oO N oOo F y DY 50 Extract the following zip file to your desired location D Drivers XPS Win_7Vista XPS V3_E525w zip where D is the drive letter of the optical drive Click Start gt Control Panel Hardware and Sound gt Printers Click Add a printer Click Add a local printer Select the port connected to this printer and then click Next Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box Click Browse and then select the extracted folder in step 1 Click OK Select your printer name and click Next Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows 10 11 12 13 To change the printer name enter the printer name in the Printer name text box and then click Next To use this printer as the default printer select the Set as the default printer check box and then click Next Installation starts If you do not share your printer select Do not share this printer If you share your printer select Share this printer so that others on your network can find and use it Click Next As the driver installation is completed click Print a test page to verify installation Click Finish For Windows 7 Windows 7 64 bit Edition or Windows Server 2008 R2 1 oo wn OO oO Eh 0 NN _ gt 12 13 Extract the following zip fil
321. ter Scanning 215 6 Load the document s face up into the ADF with the top edge of the document s in first OR Place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 or Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 Ensure that Scan to is highlighted and then press the Y Set button You can also scan documents by the following steps a Press the gt Scan button b Ensure that Scan to USB Memory is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the V button to select the folder to store the scanned file in and then press the V Set button If you do not specify the folder skip this step Configure the scan settings as necessary Settings such as file format and color mode are available To configure these settings press the V button until Preferences is highlighted and then press the Y Set button For details about setting items see Scan Defaults on page 121 Ensure that Start Scan is highlighted and then press the gt Start button Using the ID Scan 1 2 Perform steps 1 to 5 in Basic Scanning Procedures on page 215 Be sure to place the ID card on the document glass Press the V button until Start ID Scan is highlighted and then press the Y Set button After the front side of the ID card is scanned the display prompts you to turn it over a To scan the rear side
322. ter is connected using Web Services on Devices WSD For Windows Vista 1 Click Start gt Network 2 Right click the icon for the printer and then click Install 3 Click Continue The printer is connected using Web Services on Devices WSD Procedures for Scanning via Web Services on Devices WSD 1 Load the document s facing up into the ADF with the top edge of the document s in first OR Place a single document facing down on the document glass and close the document cover For details about loading a document see Making Copies From the ADF on page 191 or Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 189 2 Press the gt Scan button Press the W button until Scan to Computer is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 4 Press the V button until the desired computer you want to send the scan job to is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 5 Press the V button until Event is highlighted and then press the Y Set button Press the W button until the desired scan event is highlighted and then press the Y Set button K NOTE Which application each scan event is associated with depends on the setting on the computer 7 Ensure that Start Scan is highlighted and then press the gt Start button Scanning 201 Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver Your printer supports the TWAIN driver for scanning images TWAIN is one of the standard components provided by Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows
323. ter to the list manually You may specify the IP address and port name at this point If you have installed this printer on the server computer select the I am setting up this printer on a server check box K NOTE If you are running any of the following operating systems a Windows Security Alert is displayed e Windows Vista e Windows Vista 64 bit Edition e Windows 7 e Windows 7 64 bit Edition e Windows 8 e Windows 8 64 bit Edition e Windows 8 1 e Windows 8 1 64 bit Edition e Windows Server 2008 e Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition e Windows Server 2008 R2 64 bit Edition e Windows Server 2012 e Windows Server 2012 R2 To continue installing the driver click Unblock or Allow access for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 6 Specify the printer settings as necessary and then click Next 7 Select the software and documentation you want to install and then click Install You can specify folders in which to install the software and documentation To change the folders click Change Destination Folder and then specify a new location 8 Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Ready to Print screen appears 52 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows Installing XML Paper Specification XPS Printer Driver K NOTE The XML Paper Specification XPS driver is supported on the following operating systems Windows Vista Windows Vista 64 bit Edition Windows 7 Windows
324. ters Confirm it when selecting the printer name on your Wi Fi mobile device WPS Setup Configures the Wi Fi Direct network using WPS Group Owner Sets your printer as the group owner for Wi Fi Direct SSID Character string Specifies a name to identify the Wi Fi Direct network Up to 32 following DIRECT alphanumeric characters can be entered DIRECT cannot be changed Pass Phrase Displays the passphrase Confirm it when entering the passphrase into your Wi Fi mobile device IP Address Displays the IP address of the Wi Fi Direct adapter Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask TCP IP Purpose To configure the IP address subnet mask and gateway address of the printer Values TCP IP Settings Host Name Specifies the host name IP Mode Specifies the IP mode IPv4 IP Address Mode Selects the IP address mode Manual IP Address Manually sets the IP address Manual Subnet Mask Manually sets the subnet mask Manual Gateway Address Manually sets the gateway address 100 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool IPv6 Obtain address from DHCP Allows you to enable or disable the automatic setting of the IP address via DHCP Use Manual Address To set the IP address manually Manual Address Manually sets the IP address To specify an IPv6 address enter the address followed by a slash and then 64 For details consult your system administrator Auto Statef
325. the Y Set button 0 Aa Ww N Configure the scan settings as necessary Settings such as file format and color mode are available To configure these settings press the V button until Preferences is highlighted and then press the Y Set button For details about setting items see Scan Defaults on page 121 6 Ensure that Start Scan is highlighted and then press the gt Start button 200 Scanning Scanning From the Operator Panel Using Web Services on Devices WSD If the printer is connected to a computer via network using Web Services on Devices WSD protocol you can use the protocol to send scanned images to a computer Z NOTE You need to connect the printer and your computer via the protocol before scanning your documents K NOTE The protocol is supported only on Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 and Windows 8 1 Printer Setup for Scanning via Web Services on Devices WSD Setup the printer and computer for connection using Web Services on Devices WSD Checking the Printer Setting Set WSD to Enable in the printer settings See Protocol on page 141 for details Setting Up the Computer K NOTE For Windows 8 and Windows 8 1 the computer automatically connects the printer using Web Services on Devices WSD There is no need to install the printer manually For Windows 7 1 Click Start gt Computer gt Network 2 Right click the icon for the printer and then click Install The prin
326. the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call The interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds The default is 6 seconds Auto Rec Ans FAX Purpose To set the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming call The interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds The default is 21 seconds Line Monitor Purpose To set the volume of the line monitor which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made Values Off Turns off the volume of the line monitor Low Sets the volume of the line monitor Medium High Understanding the Printer Menus 143 Ring Tone Volume Purpose To set the volume of the ring tone which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone Fax Values Off Turns off the volume of the ring tone Low Sets the volume of the ring tone Medium High Line Type Purpose To select the line type Values PSTN Sets the line type to PSTN PBX Sets the line type to PBX Tone Pulse Purpose To select the dialing type Values Tone Sets the dialing type to Tone Pulse 10 PPS Sets the dialing type to Pulse 10 pulse per second Resend Delay Purpose To s
327. the tray with both hands and remove it from the printer 1 Loading Paper K NOTE When loading legal size or user specified print media slide the extendable part of the tray while pinching the lever 4 Load the print media into the tray with the recommended print side facing up Y NOTE Do not exceed the maximum fill line in the tray Overfilling the tray may cause paper jams K NOTE When loading coated paper load one sheet at a time 5 Align the width guides and length guide against the edges of the print media Loading Paper 47 6 After confirming that the guides are adjusted and secured close the dust cover and insert the tray into the printer Inserting back the tray displays the message on the LCD panel prompting you to specify the paper size in the tray 7 Press the V button until the appropriate paper size is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 8 Press the V button until the appropriate paper type is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 48 Loading Paper Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows Identifying Printer Driver Pre install Status Before installing the printer driver on your computer check the IP address of your printer by performing one of the procedures in Verifying the IP Address on page 45 Changing the Firewall Settings Before Installing Your Printer If you are running one of the following operating systems you must change the firewall setti
328. tialize NVM non volatile memory for the network feature and reboot the printer You can also initialize the NVM of the printer from Reset Defaults in the Printer Settings menu 106 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool Values Initialize NIC NVRAM Click Start to initialize NVM Network settings will revert to the factory default settings and Memory and restart printer reboot the network capability Restart Printer Click Start to reboot the printer Security This tab contains the Set Password Authentication System Kerberos Server LDAP Server LDAP Authentication LDAP User Mapping SSL TLS IPsec Display Network Settings and IP Filter 1Pv4 pages Set Password Purpose To set or change the password that is required to access the setup parameters of the printer from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool This page can also be displayed by clicking Set Password in the left frame K NOTE If you forgot your password initialize NVM non volatile memory to restore the password to the default NULL See Reset Print Server on page 106 Z NOTE When you change the password to lock the operator panel set the password from Panel Lock in the Printer Settings menu Values Administrator Password Sets the password using up to 10 alphanumeric characters The password will appear as asterisks in the field when it is entered Re enter Administrator Enter the password again to confirm Password Authen
329. tication System Purpose To specify the server authentication type the server response time out or the search time out Values Authentication Type for Authentication System Select the authentication system from the list When the server ColorTrack PRO Settings you are accessing uses the Kerberos authentication select Kerberos Windows as the authentication method and specify the server settings in Kerberos Server on page 107 Optional Information Server Response Time Out Sets the amount of time the printer should wait for response from the server Sets the time period from 1 to 75 seconds Search Time Out Sets the amount of time the printer should wait for searching the server Sets the time period from 5 to 120 seconds Kerberos Server Purpose To specify the settings for the Kerberos server Values Kerberos Server for Server IP Address Host Name amp Sets the IP address or host name and the port address The port Address Phone Book Port address must be 88 or between 5000 and 65535 Domain Name Enter the domain name Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 107 LDAP Server Purpose To specify the settings of the LDAP server Values Server Information IP Address Host Name amp Sets IP address or the host name and the port address The port for Color Track PRO Port address must be 389 636 3268 3269 or between 5000 and 65535 When LDAPS communication is req
330. to upload the certificate file to the printer Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 109 Certificate Management Click to display the Certificate Management page and to manage a security certification from the page Category Displays the device to certificate Issued To Displays the device to certificate Issuer Displays the issuer to certificate Serial Number Displays the serial number of the device Public Key Method Displays the public key method Public Key Size Displays the size of public key Valid From Displays the time the certificate is valid Valid Until Displays the time the certificate is invalid Status Displays whether certificate is valid or not Certificate Purpose Displays the purpose of certificate Certificate Selection Status Displays the type of device certificate Delete Click to delete this certificate Delete All Certificates Click to delete all the certificates 1 This item is available only when the self signed certificate has been generated 2 This item is effective only when connected via SSL TLS https Only the administrator is allowed to display the pages Psec Purpose To specify the Security Architecture settings for Internet Protocol IPsec for encrypted communication to the printer Values IPsec Settings Protocol Select the check box to enable the protocol IKE Auth
331. tocol or enter a new login name Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 115 Login Password Allows you to view or edit the password that is required to access the selected protocol or enter a new password Re enter Password Enter the password again to confirm Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings Back Click this button to return to the top page Server Address Delete Purpose To delete the server address entries registered on the Server Address page The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Delete on the Server Address top page Values ID Displays the selected server ID Name Displays the name assigned for the server ID Server Address Displays the server address registered under the server ID Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings Back Click this button to return to the top page Tray Settings Use this menu to set the paper size and type of paper loaded in the standard 150 sheet tray Values MPF Paper Size Sets the size of paper loaded in the standard 150 sheet tray MPF Paper Type Sets the type of paper loaded in the standard 150 sheet tray MPF Custom Size Y Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the standard 150 sheet tray MPF Custom Size X Sets the width of custom size paper loade
332. ts the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear or disables the tone All Tones Sets the volume of all the alert tones or disables all the tones Job Time Out Specifies the amount of time that the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer The print job is canceled if it times out Panel Language Used to set the language on the operator panel Disable printing with larger Specifies whether to print jobs if the paper set in the tray of the printer is larger than the paper paper size size set in the printer driver the paper size does not have to match Auto Log Print Specifies if a job history needs to be printed after every 20 jobs mm inch Specifies the measurement unit displayed after the numeric value on the operator panel 1 Enter 5 in Power Saver Timer Sleep to put the printer in the power saver timer mode 5 minutes after it finishes a job This uses less energy but requires more warm up time for the printer Enter 5 if your printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting and you notice lights flickering Select a high value if your printer is in constant use In most circumstances this keeps the printer ready to operate with minimum warm up time Select a value between 5 and 30 minutes for the power saver timer mode if you want a balance between energy consumption and a shorter warm up period The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the power saver time
333. tter M N O and finally 6 To enter additional letters repeat the first step Press the Y Set button when you are finished Keypad Letters and Numbers A o lt Assigned numbers letters or characters _ amp space lt gt abcABC2 def DEF3 ghiGHI4 jklJKLS5 mnoMNO6 pqrsPQRS7 tuvTUV8 wxyzWXYZ9 0 ojojoj N DD oo A wy N a Changing Numbers or Names If an incorrect name or number is entered press the lt X Backspace button to delete the last digit or character Then enter the correct number or character Inserting a Pause For some telephone systems it is necessary to enter an access code and listen for a second dial tone A pause must be entered in order for the access code to function For example enter the access code 9 and then press the Y Redial Pause button before entering the telephone number appears on the display when a pause is entered Operator Panel 73 Printing a Panel Settings Page You can check the current settings of the printer menus For details about how to print a panel settings report see Understanding the Printer Menus on page 117 Changing the Language To display a different language on the operator panel Operator Panel 1 Press the El Menu button 2 Pressthe Y button until System is highlighted and then press the Y Set button 3 Press the Y button until Pane
334. u share your printer select Share this printer so that others on your network can find and use it Click Next 13 As the driver installation is completed click Print a test page to verify installation To use this printer as the default printer select the Set as the default printer check box 14 Click Finish For Windows 8 Windows 8 64 bit Edition Windows 8 1 Windows 8 1 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2012 or Windows Server 2012 R2 1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location D Drivers XPS Win_8 XPS V4_E525w zip where D is the drive letter of the optical drive 2 Right click the bottom left corner of the screen and then click Control Panel 3 Click Hardware and Sound Hardware for Windows Server 2012 and Windows Server 2012 R2 gt Devices and Printers gt Add a printer 54 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows 4 Select your printer or click The printer that I want isn t listed When you select your printer go to step 7 When you click The printer that I want isn t listed go to step 5 Select Add a printer using a TCP IP address or hostname and then click Next Select TCP IP Device from Device type and enter the IP address for Hostname or IP address and then click Next 7 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box Click Browse and then select the extracted folder in step 1 Click OK 10 Select your printer name and click Next 11 To change the printer n
335. ues ROMAN 8 DESKTOP ISO 21 ROMANEXT MC TEXT ISO 60 ISO L1 PS TEXT ISO 69 ISO L2 MS PUB WIN 3 0 ISO L5 MATH 8 SYMBOL PC 8 PS MATH WINGDINGS PC 8 DN PI FONT DNGBTSMS PC 850 LEGAL ISO L6 PC 852 ISO 4 PC 1004 PC 8 TK ISO 6 PC 775 WIN Ll ISO 11 WINBALT WIN L2 ISO 15 UCS 2 WIN L5 ISO 17 Font Size Purpose To specify the font size for scalable typographical fonts within the range of 4 00 to 50 00 The default is 12 00 Font size refers to the height of the characters and one point equals approximately 1 72 of an inch K NOTE This menu is only displayed for typographical fonts Font Pitch Purpose To specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts within the range of 6 00 to 24 00 The default is 10 00 Font pitch refers to the number of fixed space characters in a horizontal inch of type For nonscalable monospaced fonts the pitch is displayed but cannot be changed K NOTE This menu is only displayed for fixed or monospaced fonts Form Line Purpose To set the number of lines in a page Values Available Range The values are in increments of 1 5 128 64 A4 60 Letter The default varies depending on country specific factory default Understanding the Printer Menus 133 The printer sets the amount of space between each line vertical line spacing based on the Paper Size and Orientation menu items Select the correct paper size and orientation before changing Form Line See
336. uired set the port number to 636 and when you use the global catalog set the port number to 3269 LDAP Server Displays the current software information of the LDAP server Optional Information Search Directory Root Enter the search directory root for Server Address Phone Login Credentials to Access Select credential used to access the LDAP server Book LDAP Server Login Name Enter the login name Password Enter the login password using to 127 alphanumeric characters Re enter Password Enter the login password again to confirm it Search Time Out Select Wait LDAP Server Limit to follow the time specified by the LDAP server Select Wait to specify the time between 5 and 120 seconds Search Name Order Sets the search order Server Address Book Select the check box to enable you to search the e mail addresses in the LDAP server when sending e mails from the printer Server Phone Book Select the check box to enable you to search the fax numbers in the LDAP server when sending faxes from the printer LDAP Authentication Purpose To specify the LDAP server authentication method Values LDAP Authentication for Authentication Method Shows the authentication method Server Address Phone Book Use Added Text String Select whether to use the added text string from the list Text String Added to User Name Enter the added text string LDAP User Mapping Purpose To specify t
337. ull Address Displays the statefull address Stateless Address 1 3 Displays the stateless addresses Link Local Address Displays the link local address Manual Gateway Address Manually sets the gateway address Auto Configure Gateway Displays the gateway address Address DNS DNS Domain Name Specifies the domain name of the domain name server Up to 255 alphanumeric characters periods and hyphens can be used If you need to specify more than one domain name separate them using a comma or semicolon IPv4 Get DNS Server Address from Specifies whether to get the DHCP DNS server address automatically from the DHCP server Manual DNS Server Address Sets the DNS server address IPv6 Get DNS Server Address from Select the check box to get the DHCPv6 lite DNS server address automatically from the DHCPv6 lite server Manual DNS Server Address Sets the DNS server address LPD Connection Time Out Sets the connection time out period from 1 to 1000 seconds IP Filter 1Pv4 Specifies the IP address and subnet mask to be permitted or denied access to the printer Port9100 Port Number Sets the port number from 9000 to 9999 Connection Time Out Sets the connection time out period between 1 and 1000 seconds IP Filter 1Pv4 Specifies the IP address and subnet mask to be permitted or denied access to the printer HTTP Port Number Sets the port number This must be 80 or between 8000 and 9999 Simultaneous Connections Displays the ma
338. uration Web Tool or Address Book Editor Scanning 209 From the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 1 Open a web browser 2 Enter the IP address of the printer in the address bar and click Go The printer s web page appears K NOTE For details on how to check the IP address of the printer see Verifying the IP Address on page 45 3 Click Address Book The login dialog box appears e e A a ee f P cle Dell Color MFP E525w IPv4 055 S85 DS IPv6 Link Local Address 006 SA TRL maT IPv6 Stateless Address 1 3525 Dal DCU Vom Location Printer Status Contact Person Printer Jobs English Y Printer Settings Print Server Settings f Printer status Printer Status Printer Events Printer Information Print Volume Printer Status Refresh Printer Information Tray Settings Cyan Cartridge Level 98 4 Enter the correct user name and password K NOTE The default user name is admin and the default password is left blank NULL 5 Click the Server Address tab 6 Select any unused number and click Create Gel iy A RAE Ca P e Saminin Dell Color MFP E525w IPV4 ME 3EB DEA IPv6 Link Local Address ai E T IPv6 Stateless Address 1 24545 LAE POLO BOT Location Printer Status Contact Person Printer Jobs Engh v Printer Settings Print Server Settings Fe
339. ustment from the list at the left side of the page The registration adjustment page is displayed Maintaining Your Printer 271 6 Clear the On check box for Auto Registration Adjustment 7 Select the value with the straight line and then click Apply New Settings 8 Click Start next to Print Color Regi Chart The color registration chart is printed with the new values 9 Adjust the values for every color until the lines at 0 are the straightest If a line is not the straightest at 0 determine the value and adjust the printer again AN CAUTION After printing the color registration chart do not turn off the printer until the printer motor has stopped running Cleaning the Scanner Keeping the scanner clean helps ensure the best possible copies It is recommended to clean the scanner at the start of each day and during the day as needed 1 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water 2 Open the document cover 212 Maintaining Your Printer 3 Wipe the surface of the document glass and ADF glass until it is clean and dry White Sheet White Document Cover A N gt Document Glass ADF Glass 4 Wipe the underside of the white document cover and white sheet until they are clean and dry Maintaining Your Printer 273 5 Close the document cover Cleaning the ADF Feed Roller Keeping the ADF feed roller clean helps ensure the best possible copies It is recomme
340. utton to clear the message Lower Modem Speed 062 321 Turn off the printer and then on If this does not solve the problem contact Dell See Contacting Dell on 062 360 page 310 062 790 Press the Y Set button The scanned data is deleted Retry scanning the document 075 100 Check and clear the paper path load the specified paper and then press the Y Set button See Clearing Paper Jams From the Front of the Printer on page 282 075 921 Load paper for the second side odd pages and press the Y Set button See Loading Print Media When Manual Duplex Printing on page 174 077 100 Open the rear cover and remove the jammed paper See Clearing Paper Jams From the Back of the Printer on 077 101 page 282 077 102 077 104 077 105 077 300 Close the rear cover 077 900 Open the rear cover and remove the jammed paper See Clearing Paper Jams From the Output Tray on page 284 077 901 Open the rear cover and remove the jammed paper See Clearing Paper Jams From the Back of the Printer on page 282 091 313 Turn off the printer and then on If this does not solve the problem contact Dell See Contacting Dell on page 310 091 402 Turn off the printer and then on If this does not solve the problem contact Dell See Contacting Dell on page 310 092 310 Clean the CTD sensor See Cleaning the Color Toner Density CTD Sensor on page 268 093 423 Replace the specified toner cartridge soon Order a new consumable from www de
341. vEmail Server Adaress F Print Volume Server Address AS TES Server Address Address List to 020 2132 Printer Information ID Name Server Address 01 Not in Use Create di 02 Noti Use E Mail Alert patada 04 Not in Use Set Password 05 Not in Use Gass A 06 Not in Use Online Help TETTEN Order Supplies at 08 Not in Use e www dell com supplies 09 Not in Use al Contact Dell Support at AS ma Sep ge 11 Not in Use Create 12 Notin Use Create 13 Notin Use Create 14 Not in Use Create 15Not in Use Greate 16 Not in Use 17 Notin Use Creale 18 Notin Use Create 19 Not in Use Create 20 Not in Use Create Ml 210 Scanning The Server Address page appears Server Address 10 01 New Registration 1 Name e g PeterShare Sharedfolder 2 Server Type FTP SMB FIP fip Sener Address Semer Path SMB Server Address Share Name Server Path 3 Server Address e g myPC XIX XK IK 4 Share Name e g SMB Share Sharedfolder 5 Server Path e g FTP pub pub share SMB finance finance Peter finance Peter Sales 6 Server Port Number FTP 21 5000 65535 SMB 139 5000 65535 7 Login Name e g FTP anonymous Peter SMB Peter Domain Peter 8 Login Password 9 Re enter Password To fill in the fields enter the information as follows 1 Name Enter a friendly name that you want to display on the Address Book 2 Server Type Select SMB if y
342. wanted numbers by accepting faxes only from the fax numbers registered in the Phone Book Remote Receive Sets whether to receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone Remote Receive Tone Specifies the remote receive code in two digits to start Remote Receive Fax Header Sets whether to print the information of sender on the header of faxes Fax Header Name Sets the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes Up to 30 alphanumeric characters can be entered Fax Number Sets the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of faxes Fax Cover Page Sets whether to attach a cover page to faxes DRPD Pattern Sets the DRPD setting from Pattern 1 to Pattern 7 DRPD is a service provided by some telephone companies Sent Fax Forward Off Does not forward received faxes Forward Forwards incoming faxes to the fax number specified in Fax Forward Number below without printing Print and Prints and forwards incoming faxes to the fax number specified in Fax Forward Forward Number below E mail only Forwards incoming faxes to the e mail address specified in Forwarding E mail Address below without printing The faxes are converted to a PDF file and sent to the destination as an e mail attachment E mail and Prints and forwards incoming faxes to the e mail address specified in Forwarding Print E mail Address below The faxes are converted to a PDF file and sent
343. with a valid and non empty password for authentication Confirm a login user name and password PPassmora S If you do not use a password for your user login you need to create a password for your user login account with the following procedure For Windows Vista and Windows 7 1 Click Start gt Control Panel 2 Click User Accounts and Family Safety 3 Click User Accounts 4 Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account For Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012 1 Right click the bottom left corner of the screen and then click Control Panel 2 Click Change PC settings 3 Click Users 4 Click Create a Password and add in a password for your user login account For Windows 8 1 and Windows Server 2012 R2 1 Right click the bottom left corner of the screen and then click Control Panel 2 Click Change PC settings 3 Click Accounts 4 Click Sign in options 5 Click Add under Password and add in a password for your user login account For Windows Server 2008 1 Click Start gt Control Panel 2 Double click User Accounts 3 Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account 206 Scanning For Windows Server 2008 R2 1 2 3 4 Click Start gt Control Panel Select User Accounts Click User Accounts Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account For Mac OS X 10 6 OS X 10
344. within 3 30 sec the telephone or answering machine shall answer incoming call with 3 30sec Appendix 311 USA Canada Wi Fi Warnings Class B FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help CAUTION Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the grantee of this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Labeling Requirements This device compli
345. ximum number of connections received simultaneously by the client Connection Time Out Sets the connection time out period from to 255 seconds Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 101 WSD Port Number Sets the port number This must be 80 or between 8000 and 9999 Receive Time Out Sets the receive time out period from 1 to 65535 seconds Notification Delivery Time Sets the notification time out period from 1 to 60 seconds Out Maximum Number of TTL Sets the maximum number of TTL from 1 to 10 Maximum Number of Sets the maximum number of notifications from 10 to 20 Notification SNMP Purpose To configure the detailed settings of SNMP Values SNMP Configuration Enable SNMP v1 v2c Select the check box to enable the SNMP v1 v2c protocol Protocols Edit SNMP v1 v2c Click to display the SNMP v1 v2c page and to edit the setting of Properties SNMP vl v2c protocol from the page Enable SNMP v3 Protocols Select the check box to enable the SNMP v3 protocol Edit SNMP v3 Properties Click to display the SNMP v3 page and to edit the setting of SNMP v3 protocol from the page You can click this item only when SSL communication is enabled SNMP v1 v2c Purpose To edit the detailed settings of SNMP v1 v2 protocol To enter this page click Edit SNMP v1 v2 Properties in the SNMP page Values Community Name Community Name Read Sets the community name to access read only data using up to
346. xy server Password Sets the login password for the proxy server Retype Password Confirms the set password AirPrint Purpose To configure the detailed setting of AirPrint Values AirPrint Turn On AirPrint Click to enable the printer for AirPrint Bonjour Name Specifies the host name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and dash The original setting will remain valid if nothing is entered Location Specifies the name of the location of the printer Latitude Specifies the latitude of the location where the printer is installed Longitude Specifies the longitude of the location where the printer is installed IPP Authentication IPP Authentication Select the check box to enable the authentication feature for AirPrint If this check box is selected you need to enter the user name and password below when printing files via AirPrint User Name Enter the user name for AirPrint Password Enter the password corresponding to the above user name Retype Password Re enter your password SSL TLS SSL TLS Click Settings to move to the SSL TLS Server Communication page For details see Using Digital Certificates on page 244 Supply Levels Cyan Cartridge Level Displays the cyan toner level Magenta Cartridge Level Displays the magenta toner level Yellow Cartridge Level Displays the yellow toner level Black Cartridge Level Displays the black toner level Reset Print Server Purpose To ini
347. you notice lights flickering Select a high value if your printer is in constant use In most circumstances this keeps the printer ready to operate with minimum warm up time Select a value between 5 and 30 minutes for the power saver timer mode if you want a balance between energy consumption and a shorter warm up period The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the power saver timer mode when it receives data from the computer You can also return the printer to the standby mode by pressing any button on the operator panel Understanding the Printer Menus 149 Auto Reset Purpose To automatically reset the settings on the operator panel to the defaults and return to the standby mode after you do not specify any settings for the specified time Values 45sec lmin 2min 3min 4min Fault Time Out Purpose To specify the time taken by the printer before it cancels jobs that stop abnormally The print job is canceled if it times out Values Off Disables the fault time out On 60sec Specifies the time taken by the printer before it cancels for jobs that stop abnormally Available Range 3 300sec Job Time Out Purpose To specify the amount of time that the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer The print job is canceled if it times out Values Off Disables the job time out On 60sec Specifies the amount of time that the printer waits for
348. you try a sample first See Loading Print Media in the Standard 150 Sheet Tray on page 168 for instructions on loading an envelope When printing on envelopes Use only high quality envelopes that are designed for use in laser printers Set the print media source to standard 150 sheet tray Set the paper type to Envelope and select the correct size of envelope from the printer driver For best performance use envelopes made from 75 g m 20 lb bond paper You can use up to 105 g m 28 lb bond weight for the envelope tray as long as the cotton content is 25 or less Envelopes with 100 cotton content must not exceed 90 g m 24 lb bond weight Use only freshly unpackaged undamaged envelopes Use envelopes that can withstand temperatures of 205 C 401 F without sealing excessive curling wrinkling or releasing hazardous emissions If you have any doubts about the envelopes you are considering check with the envelope supplier Adjust the width guides and the length guide to fit the width of the envelopes 164 Print Media Guidelines To load envelope in standard 150 sheet tray the print side must be facing up See Loading Envelopes on page 171 for instructions on loading an envelope Use one envelope size during a print job Ensure that the humidity is low because high humidity more than 60 and the high printing temperatures may seal the envelopes For best performance do not use envelopes that Have excessive cu
349. your printer Refer printing problems and maintenance tasks to this key operator Determining the Status of Supplies If your printer is connected to the network the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool can provide instant feedback on remaining toner levels Enter the printer s IP address in your web browser to view this information To use the E mail Alert feature that notifies you when the printer requires new supplies enter your name or the name of the key operator in the e mail list box On the operator panel you can also confirm the following e Any supply or maintenance items that require attention replacing However the printer can only display information about one item at a time e Amount of toner remaining in each toner cartridge Conserving Supplies You can change several settings in your printer driver to conserve toner cartridge and paper Supply Setting Function Toner cartridge Toner Saving Mode in the Graphics This check box allows the users to select a print mode that uses less tab of the printer driver toner When this feature is used the image quality will be lower than when it is not used Print media Multiple Up in the Layout tab of The printer prints two or more pages on one side of a sheet The the printer driver available numbers that each printer driver can print one sheet of paper are as follows e PCL XML Paper Specification XPS printer driver 2 4 8 or 16 pages e PS printer driver 2 4 6

Dell Color Multifunction Printer E525w User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents